You are on page 1of 146

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Ministry of Water & Electricity

General Directorate for Water

Asser Region

Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs For


Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(VOLUME 2 )

(Part 1 of 2)

Dhu AL – Qi‘dah 1432 H

October 2011 G
TABLE OF CONTENT
PAGE

CHAPTER 1 ............................................................................................................................. 1
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE TENDER ...................................................................... 1
1-1 THE PURPOSE OF THE TENDER: ..................................................................... 1
1-2 TENDER DOCUMENTS:........................................................................................ 1
1-3 PREVIOUS EXPERIENCE OF BIDDERS ........................................................... 1
1-4 THE PROGRAM OF THE IMPLEMENTATION WORKS: ............................. 1
1-5 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT THE DRAWINGS AND DATA
AFTER ACCEPTANCE OF THE TENDER AND THE TIME SCHEDULE
FOR SUBMISSION DRAWINGS AND DATA..................................................... 1
1-5-1 SURVEY WORKS AT SITES ............................................................................... 2
1-5-2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MANUFACTURING DRAWINGS .......................... 2
1-5-3 SOIL STUDY REPORT OF SITE: ....................................................................... 3
1-5-4 COPIES FOR THE INTERNATIONAL CODES FOR THE
SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................. 3
1-6 THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR FOR FACILITIES AND
EQUIPMENT LIST: ................................................................................................ 3
1-7 THE PRIORITY TO SAUDI SPECIFICATIONS AND NATIONAL
PRODUCTS: ............................................................................................................. 4
1-8 MEANS OF TRAVEL TO SAUDI ARABIA: ....................................................... 4
1-9 THE BUSINESS DOCUMENTED AND PROVIDES THE DEPARTMENT
OF PUBLIC RELATIONS DIRECTORATE BY THE FOLLOWING:............ 4
1-9-1 EDITING A BOOK MEDIA OR FILMING A SHORT FILM ACCORDING
TO THE MAINSTREAM OF THE MINISTRY:................................................ 4
1-9-2 ILLUSTRATION THE PROGRESS OF THE WORK AND TO REGISTER
BY PHOTOGRAPHS: ............................................................................................ 4
1-10 DOCUMENTED DRAWINGS (DEPENDING ON EXECUTION):................... 5
1-11 SITE ENGINEER’S OFFICES, LATRINES, ETC. ............................................. 5
1-12 PROVISION EQUIPMENT, TOOLS AND SURVEY WORKERS TO THE
ENGINEER: .............................................................................................................. 6
1-13 THE TEMPORARY LOCATION FOR THE SUPPLIED TASKS AND
MATERIALS, WORKSHOPS AND STAFF ACCOMMODATION ................. 7
1-13-1 THE TEMPORARY LOCATION OF THE EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED AND
RAW MATERIALS AND WORKSHOPS: .......................................................... 7
1-13-2 LABOR CAMPS: .................................................................................................... 7
1-14 ACCESS WAY TO THE SITE................................................................................ 7
1-15 SUPPLYING SANITARY ACCOMMODATION: ............................................... 7

-i-
1-16 MEANS OF FIRST AID .......................................................................................... 8
1-17 SITE CLEARING AND CLEANING..................................................................... 8
1-18 PROTECTION FROM INSECTS .......................................................................... 8
1-19 ELECTRICITY AT SITE ........................................................................................ 8
1-20 SITE WATER SUPPLY ........................................................................................... 8
1-21 SIGN BOARDS ......................................................................................................... 8
1-22 ZERO LEVEL........................................................................................................... 9
1-23 PROTECTION AND REMOVE THE WATER FROM SITE WORKS ............ 9
1-24 MATERIAL SAMPLES........................................................................................... 9
1-25 TESTING MATERIALS AND WORKMAN SHIP:........................................... 10
1-26 FENCING, LIGHTING, SECURITY AND TRAFFIC PRECAUTIONS: ....... 10
1-27 ROADS CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................... 10
1-28 PRIMARY SUBMISSION ..................................................................................... 11
CHAPTER 2 ........................................................................................................................... 13
TECHNICAL DATA AND WORK DESCRIPTION ........................................................ 13
2-1 THE PURPOSE OF THE PROJECT: ................................................................. 13
2-2 THE PROPOSED PROJECT: .............................................................................. 13
CHAPTER 3 ........................................................................................................................... 14
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR WATER AND SEWAGE PIPELINE ............... 14
3-1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 14
3-1-1 METHOD OF NUMBERING AND CROSS – REFERENCE TO THE
SPECIFICATIONS. .............................................................................................. 14
3-1-1-1 METHOD OF NUMBERING .............................................................................. 14
3-1-1-2 REFERENCE ATTRIBUTION ........................................................................... 14
3-1-2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS OF TERMS ...................................... 15
3-1-2-1 ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................... 15
3-1-2-2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 17
3-1-3 SCOPE AND CONTROL OF WORKS ............................................................... 18
3-1-3-1 INTENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................... 18
3-1-3-2 SILENCE OF SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... 18
3-1-3-3 CONTRACTOR'S WORK AREAS .................................................................... 18
3-1-3-4 WATER SUPPLY ................................................................................................. 19
3-1-3-5 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY .................................................................................... 19
3-1-3-6 EXISTING UTILITIES AND OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS .............................. 19
3-1-3-7 SIGN BOARDS ..................................................................................................... 22

- ii -
3-1-3-8 SURVEYING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................... 22
3-1-3-9 SETTING OUT OF WORKS............................................................................... 22
3-1-3-10 HAUL ROUTES FOR HEAVY VEHICLES ..................................................... 23
3-1-3-11 SCAFFOLDING AND FALSEWORK ............................................................... 24
3-1-3-12 USE OF EXPLOSIVES ........................................................................................ 24
3-1-3-13 FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT ........................................................................ 24
3-1-3-14 PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDS OF CONSTRUCTION ................................... 25
3-1-3-15 SITE CLEANING AND FINAL CLEAN UP ..................................................... 25
3-1-4 TEMPORARY WORKS ........................................................................................ 25
3-1-4-1 SCOPE.................................................................................................................... 25
3-1-4-2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 26
3-1-4-3 GREEMENT OF PROPERTY OWNERS ......................................................... 26
3-1-5 CONTROL OF MATERIALS AND STANDARDS FOR SAMPLING AND
TESTING ................................................................................................................. 26
3-1-5-1 STORAGE OF MATERIALS.............................................................................. 26
3-1-5-2 HANDLING MATERIALS .................................................................................. 26
3-1-5-3 MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY EMPLOYER ..................................................... 26
3-1-5-4 LOCAL MATERIAL SOURCES ........................................................................ 26
3-1-5-5 SOURCES OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS........................ 27
3-1-5-6 CERTIFICATES OF GUARANTEE AND PRODUCTION PLANT
INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 27
3-1-5-7 SAMPLING AND TESTING PROCEDURES .................................................. 27
3-1-5-8 SAMPLING AND TESTING STANDARDS ..................................................... 28
3-1-5-9 UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS ...................................................................... 28
3-1-6 CONTRACTOR'S PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ................................................ 29
3-1-6-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 29
3-1-6-2 CONTRACTOR'S SCHEDULE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ................. 29
3-1-6-3 PROVISION AND USE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ............................... 29
3-1-7 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES ...................................................................... 29
3-1-7-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 29
3-1-7-2 MANUFACTURED ITEMS ................................................................................ 30
3-1-7-3 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES ....................................................................... 30
3-1-7-4 WEIGHT MEASUREMENTS............................................................................. 30
3-1-7-5 LINEAR AND AREA MEASUREMENTS ........................................................ 30
3-1-7-6 VOLUME MEASUREMENTS IN VEHICLES................................................. 30
3-1-7-7 EARTHWORK VOLUME MEASUREMENTS ............................................... 30

- iii -
3-1-8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES ................................................................................ 31
3-1-8-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 31
3-1-8-2 TEMPORARY SITE FACILITIES .................................................................... 32
3-1-8-3 CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY BUILDINGS .............................................. 33
3-1-8-4 TEMPORARY SERVICES.................................................................................. 33
3-1-8-5 DIVERSION OF PUBLIC UTILITY SERVICES............................................. 34
3-1-9 SAFETY PRECAUTION MEASURES ............................................................... 34
3-1-9-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 34
3-2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING ................................................................ 34
3-2-1 SCOPE.................................................................................................................... 34
3-2-2 SITE CLEARING ................................................................................................. 34
3-2-2-1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ........................................................................... 34
3-2-2-2 REMOVAL OF REALIGNMENT OF OBSTRUCTION AND UTILITIES. 34
3-2-3 EXCAVATION...................................................................................................... 35
3-2-3-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 35
3-2-3-2 TOP SOIL .............................................................................................................. 35
3-2-3-3 EXCAVATING...................................................................................................... 35
3-2-3-4 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS ............................................................................. 37
3-2-3-5 ROCK EXCAVATION......................................................................................... 37
3-2-3-6 ROAD EXCAVATION (FOR PREPARATION OF SERVICE ROADS
ALONG PIPELINES) ........................................................................................... 38
3-2-3-7 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES ................................................................ 40
3-2-3-8 EXCAVATION FOR PIPE TRENCHES ........................................................... 42
3-2-3-9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THRUST BORING ............................ 44
3-2-4 BACKFILLING WORKS .................................................................................... 47
3-2-4-1 SCOPE OF WORKS ............................................................................................. 47
3-2-4-2 FILLING MATERIAL AND BORROW MATERIAL..................................... 47
3-2-4-3 BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES ............................................................... 48
3-2-4-4 EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION ................................................................. 51
3-2-4-5 PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE TRENCHES
................................................................................................................................. 56
3-2-5 SUBGRADE CONSTRUCTION ......................................................................... 58
3-2-5-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 58
3-2-5-2 MATERIALS......................................................................................................... 59
3-2-5-3 WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................. 59
3-2-6 GABIONS .............................................................................................................. 60

- iv -
3-2-6-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 60
3-2-6-2 MATERIALS......................................................................................................... 60
3-2-6-3 CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................ 61
3-2-7 STONE PITCHING IN CONCRETE ................................................................. 61
3-2-7-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 62
3-2-7-2 MATERIALS......................................................................................................... 62
3-2-7-3 PLACING .............................................................................................................. 62
3-2-8 GEOTEXTILES .................................................................................................... 62
3-2-8-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 62
3-2-8-2 MATERIAL ........................................................................................................... 62
3-2-8-3 WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................. 63
3-3 PAVEMENT AND ROADS SURFACE FINISHING ......................................... 63
3-3-1 SCOPE ..................................................................................................................... 63
3-3-2 GRANULAR SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES ............................................... 63
3-3-2-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 63
3-3-2-2 MATERIALS......................................................................................................... 64
3-3-2-3 CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................ 66
3-3-3 BITUMINOUS LAYERS ....................................................................................... 67
3-3-3-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 67
3-3-3-2 MATERIALS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS COURSES .... 67
3-3-3-3 CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................ 70
3-3-4 PAVEMENT REPAIRS AND TRENCH REINSTATEMENT WORKS ......... 72
3-3-4-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 72
3-3-4-2 ASPHALTING ...................................................................................................... 73
3-3-4-3 MATERIALS......................................................................................................... 73
3-3-4-4 CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR WORKS ...................................................... 73
3-3-5 CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS AND PAVED MEDIANS ......................... 74
3-3-5-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 74
3-3-5-2 MATERIALS AND PRECAST MANUFACTURE........................................... 75
3-3-5-3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION ....................................................... 76
3-3-6 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC AND DETOURS............................................. 80
3-3-6-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 80
3-3-6-2 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC ................................... 80
3-4 PIPE WORKS AND NETWORK ACCESSORIES ............................................ 81
3-4-1 SCOPE ..................................................................................................................... 81

-v-
3-4-2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 81
3-4-2-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 81
3-4-2-2 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION................................................................... 81
3-4-2-3 RIGHT OF WAY (ROW)..................................................................................... 82
3-4-2-4 MATERIALS, PRODUCTS SUPPLY AND HANDLING ............................... 82
3-4-3 PIPES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES ........................................................... 86
3-4-3-1 MATERIALS......................................................................................................... 86
3-4-3-2 ACCESSORIES..................................................................................................... 94
3-4-3-3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION ....................................................... 95
3-4-3-4 PIPE WORK TESTING ....................................................................................... 96
3-4-4 VALVES, GATES, STOPS, WATER CONECTIONS FIRE HYDRANTS
AND SUNDRY WORKS ...................................................................................... 100
3-4-4-1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................... 100
3-4-4-2 VALVES ............................................................................................................... 100
3-4-4-3 FIRE HYDRANTS .............................................................................................. 105
3-4-4-4 HOUSE CONNECTION .................................................................................... 107
3-4-4-5 JOINTING MATERIALS AND ADAPTORS ................................................. 108
3-4-4-6 VALVE ACCESSORIES.................................................................................... 109
3-4-4-7 VALVE OPERATORS ....................................................................................... 110
3-4-4-8 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION ..................................................... 111
3-4-4-9 AUTOMATIC BUTTERFLY VALVE OPERATED WITH ELECTRIC
MOTOR (VALVE ACTUATOR) ...................................................................... 112
3-4-4-10 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................ 115
3-4-5 BEDDING, SURROUND, HAUNCHING, ENCASEMENT AND THRUST
BLOCKS ................................................................................................................ 117
3-4-5-1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................... 117
3-4-5-2 MATERIALS....................................................................................................... 117
3-4-5-3 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................... 118
3-4-6 VALVE CHAMBERS .......................................................................................... 118
3-4-6-1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................... 118
3-4-6-2 MATERIALS....................................................................................................... 118
3-4-6-3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION ..................................................... 119
3-4-7 RECORDS ............................................................................................................. 120
3-4-8 STEEL WATER TANKS ..................................................................................... 121
3-4-9 PAINT AND PROTECTION OF SURFACES .................................................. 128
3-4-9-1 PROTECTION OF SURFACES ......................................................................... 128

- vi -
3-4-9-2 TREATMENT OF DAMAGED PROTECTION LAYERS ............................. 128
3-4-9-3 PAINTS .................................................................................................................. 128
3-4-10 CHLORINATION SYSTEM - PROCESS ......................................................... 130
3-5 SEWER NETWORK WORKS ........................................................................... 133
3-5-1 PIPE WORKS ....................................................................................................... 133
3-5-2 MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS ....................................................................... 134
3-5-2-1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 134
3-5-2-2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 134
3-5-2-3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION....................................................... 135

- vii -
CHAPTER 1
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE TENDER
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

CHAPTER 1
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE TENDER

1-1 THE PURPOSE OF THE TENDER:


The general Directorate of Water at Asir region want to implement the contract
for the construction of eight storage tanks of structural steel Abha urban area, as
well as all the ancillary buildings and site works and control works in order to
store drinking water. And this folder contains the technical specifications for
this contract
It also includes Part II of this volume a description “the work to be performed
accompanied by technical data that cover the requirements of the tender.
1-2 TENDER DOCUMENTS:
Tender documents consist of volumes shown as following:

 Volume I: Instructions to bidders and the general conditions.


 Volume II: Special conditions and technical specifications
 Volume III: Bill of quantities.
 Volume IV: Drawings.
1-3 PREVIOUS EXPERIENCE OF BIDDERS
The bidders must provide with their tenders the previous experience in a similar
works in execution & implementation of networks according to standard
specifications & attached a list of similar works carried out by this company,
also provide a detailed implementation procedure supported with workshop
drawings & required equipments with dates.
1-4 THE PROGRAM OF THE IMPLEMENTATION WORKS:
The contractor shall within a period of two weeks of the acceptance of his
tender to submit five copies of the execution works proposed to the Engineer for
approval, the program provides the critical path method, and shows the planning
dates for implementation of the proposed works, and the contractor shall shows
the employment and the equipments that will be use at the project.
1-5 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT THE DRAWINGS AND DATA
AFTER ACCEPTANCE OF THE TENDER AND THE TIME
SCHEDULE FOR SUBMISSION DRAWINGS AND DATA
After the acceptance of the tender the contractor shall submit data and drawings
within four weeks to the engineer for approval, and in cases that will not possess
proposals contractor approved Engineer, the contractor shall submit the
drawings after modifications not more than three weeks from the date of
notification of the modifications and, if necessary, may be re-modify the
drawings again so as to match the notifications of the engineer, and will be
clearly understood that the approval of the Engineer will not be taken as an
expression of his opinion with respect to the efficiency any part of the

-1-
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

equipment, and that this will not exempt the contractor from its obligations
responsibility under the contract.

1-5-1 SURVEY WORKS AT SITES

The contractor shall do a detailed survey of the work sites with the preparation
of maps showing levels of the surface and the path of pipes that approved from
the concerned authorities, intersections with existing facilities (water - sewage -
rain - electricity - telephone ... etc), all the obstacles encountered to work
(valves rooms - rooms electricity - lighting poles - trees - palm ... etc).
contractor will provide survey drawings of the work to the engineer for approval
prior to start work; there will be no additional costs for this works.

1-5-2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MANUFACTURING DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings and manufacturing drawings for all
components of the project and submitted at a scale appropriate to the Engineer
for approval.

The submittal drawings with survey field works do by the contractor and
approved by the Engineer, including the planning path pipes, the revised
longitudinal sectors for tubes, transfers of existing facilities, transfers roads,
Crossing under roads, sidewalks and green areas, locations and details of
manholes and the corresponding, the full constructions details facilities, full
details of the temporary and permanent buildings, and all the details that will
enable it to implement the works in accordance with the contract documents and
the approval of the Engineer.

Contractor will provide any details of the Engineer deem necessary and non-
exist in contract documents for approval before implementation.
Contractor will also provide the method of execution of each part at the project,
including the details of execution process and the details for the necessary
equipments.

Shop drawings shows any changes have occurred on the original contract
drawings, due to the change in the survey works, change the path of pipes based
on the instructions stakeholders, change the works locations, change the design
based on the nature of the soil, or as a result of any instructions of the Engineer
deems necessary to complete the work fully.
There will be no more additional costs to be pay for such actions but are loaded
with the terms of the contract and a fundamental obligation of the contractor

These drawings and technical data must conform to the contract drawings and
specifications which have the priority over any design drawings or detailing
drawings prepared by the contractor, regardless of any approval is for such
drawings, the Contractor will be responsible for the dimensions and scale
provided either by him or from his representative, and the engineer approval on

-2-
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

this drawings will exempt the contractor from responsibility to the contract.

1-5-3 SOIL STUDY REPORT OF SITE:

Before execution the contractor shall make a study of detailed soil site facilities
to be established to obtain the information necessary to the security and safety
of these facilities, the study including number of borings determined by
international standards and analysis, as well as conducting tests disc loading at
foundation level to make sure the soil's ability to with the determined effort by
the incident.

The report must include the places of the rocks and soil depths in the tube paths
and support aspects of the drilling method and method of withdrawal of
groundwater, drilling and analyzing the output of various depths and the
possibility of its use in reclamation.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a substantive report on this study,
and are loaded with all this work on the terms of the contract, but no pay for
additional costs.
The contractor will analyze the results of the detailed study of the soil and
review the work of the project based on what and where it came to provide any
visuals he has to engineer before starting work. Contractor will be responsible
for what came to study the detailed soil and for the safety of the work based on
the recommendations of the policies included regardless of the Engineer will not
relieve the adoption of this accreditation from any of its obligations under the
contract.

1-5-4 COPIES FOR THE INTERNATIONAL CODES FOR THE


SPECIFICATIONS

The Contractor shall submit a copy of the international standard specifications,


or academic equivalent specifications such as Saudi Arabia or B.S. or ASTM or
V.D.E. or DIN or European that show the tests and experiments that have been
made by the factory and validate the design and data security numbers, prior to
the date fixed for the start of the tests mentioned one month.

1-6 THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR FOR FACILITIES


AND EQUIPMENT LIST:

The responsibility of the contractor will include the following:


 The contractor shall store the tools and equipment so as to ensure the
safety of traffic and what does not affect the progress of the work of
different sites.
 The Contractor shall maintain the integrity of nearby buildings and
facilities and the surrounding work of this project, and therefore follow-up
of these facilities and buildings by monitoring points over the work on the
project in case of any damage to any of these facilities and buildings. The

-3-
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

contractor will be responsible for the return to its original condition


immediately.
 After the work is completed, the contractor re-For roads and sidewalks to
their original state upon receipt of the site.
1-7 THE PRIORITY TO SAUDI SPECIFICATIONS AND NATIONAL
PRODUCTS:
When the Saudi standard specifications are available, have the priority over
other international standards.

As are also given priority to the products of local and national contractor that
will be use when you buy any equipment prepared by the project.

1-8 MEANS OF TRAVEL TO SAUDI ARABIA:


Contractor shall use Saudi Arabia air lines in travelling for his labors and
engineers throughout the period for implementation of the project.

1-9 THE BUSINESS DOCUMENTED AND PROVIDES THE


DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC RELATIONS DIRECTORATE BY THE
FOLLOWING:
1-9-1 EDITING A BOOK MEDIA OR FILMING A SHORT FILM
ACCORDING TO THE MAINSTREAM OF THE MINISTRY:

The contractor shall print the book Media and filming a short film as it deems
Engineer includes a description of the project and the executive hierarchy, and
provide the Department of Public Relations Directorate the number of five
copies of the book and a copy of the movie on CD.

Accordingly, notice of Public Relations Directorate of the names and phones


responsible for the project to phone at any time in order to provide the media,
including place during the implementation period and to answer inquiries of
citizens.

1-9-2 ILLUSTRATION THE PROGRESS OF THE WORK AND TO


REGISTER BY PHOTOGRAPHS:

The Contractor shall submit a negative copy and print images sizes not less than
250 × 200 mm to provide the works, and when completed accordingly to the
engineer guide, and as clarify later, to be kept the negative copy and prints out
of hand, and will be back negative property of the employer where delivered to
the engineer with the images printed and will not be allowed to give these
negative copies without written permission from the employer.

-4-
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

The images will be divided into two groups:


1 - Images progress of the work.
2 - Pictures of the recording.
Each of these two groups must be signed upon adoption of the engineer, and
must record the date of shooting camera demonstration and characterization of
the subject on the image.

As for the photos taken for registration on the orders of the Engineer, will
provide two copies of them, and the Contractor and Engineer to sign on the back
of each copy for approval with written description of the purpose of this image.
The contractor can carry out a picture of an additional site also to keep it.

The contractor shall provide a copy of one negative and two publications for
each camera for each stage of the progress of the work on the orders of the
Engineer.
The contractor will submit an album kept by the images in the order after
Labeling album based on the approval of the Engineer, note that the cost of the
item on the expense of the contractor's own.
1-10 DOCUMENTED DRAWINGS (DEPENDING ON EXECUTION):
Contractor will ensure that the approved drawings have been prepared; making
it clear what has been implemented already, and will provide two copies of the
publications prepared to Engineer for approval before preparing drawings
documentaries.

During the three weeks from the date of completion of the works the contractor
will submit three copies of drawings by what has already implemented actions,
and will include drawings, graphs and tables needed to understand the
possibility of the entire project.

The Contractor shall submit to the Directorate of all data, maps and drawings to
digital format (Digital) on the discs computer, as well as for submission in the
form of maps (various sizes) and written information, and should be maps form
digital pounding, and full and productive artistically sound, and must comply
with systems known (modern) in this area, such as AutoCAD.

It will also provide microfilm copies of these drawings to the employer in


addition to the copy can be copied, and is delivered by drawings implementation
is a necessary condition for the issuance of Certificate of Primary delivery.

1-11 SITE ENGINEER’S OFFICES, LATRINES, ETC.


The Contractor shall provide site office for Engineer uses during the contract
execution , the office space area not less than 200 m2 & it should be designed
as per Engineer approval , the office should be provided with lighting,

-5-
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

electric, toilets, washing, air-conditioner ,daily maintenance, closed storage


area for surveying and testing tools keeping, The office should also provided
with following furniture in models &types are approved by the Engineer, all
contract documents including drawings & design issues, contracts &special
documents should be available
- 5 standard tables including shelves & suite chairs
- 10 suit chairs with arm's rest
- Electrical refrigerator not less than 8 foot
- Gas stove supplied with gas on a regular basis
- 5 storage steel cupboard with 4 drawers
- Telephone line with internal central and telefax equipments
- Photocopy machine with till to A3 size
- 5 electrical calculators
- Computer device with all related items and internet line
- Digital Camera
Contractor should provide all contract documents ,contracts, calculations &
drawings in the site office
1-12 PROVISION EQUIPMENT, TOOLS AND SURVEY WORKERS TO
THE ENGINEER:
The contractor shall provide the following supported devices for the use of the
reprehensive engineer:
 Integrated monitoring stations (Total station) Brand Leica Model TC 1100
or TC 1103 or Tobikun Model GT S. 712 or G T S.702 accurately at least 3
seconds.
 Three automatic balance.
 Five fathoms length of 5 meters telescopic or similar.
 Four single reflective glass (glass prism) Tsamt stick.
 Three steel bar length of 50 meters.
 Three cloth tape length of 30 meters.
 Pegs and strings and strings building and patriarchal hammers, cans and
brushes ... etc.

And these devices are from modern model, and in accordance with the adoption
of the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply as soon as the execution of the
contract terms are used throughout the duration of the contract, and therefore
maintenance and protection and the provision of labor required to help the

-6-
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

engineer to be delivery to primary work, and these devices and tools belong to
the employer for the duration of the contract, belonging to the contractor after
receiving primary education.
1-13 THE TEMPORARY LOCATION FOR THE SUPPLIED TASKS AND
MATERIALS, WORKSHOPS AND STAFF ACCOMMODATION
1-13-1 THE TEMPORARY LOCATION OF THE EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED
AND RAW MATERIALS AND WORKSHOPS:

The Contractor shall hire enough free space near the site to store equipment and
raw materials and the establishment of workshops and warehouses.

1-13-2 LABOR CAMPS:

The contractor shall hire a special building for labors accommodation and in
case this is not possible he can rent a free space to set up camp for the labors.

And are provided with all the necessary services at camps and workshops with,
lighting and telephones and all materials as will mention later in clause (1-17,1-
18, 1-19,1-20, 1-21, 1-22).

The contractor will be responsible for any damage may happen to the
foundations of buildings, roads at temporary camp as a result of ignoring
causing this damage.
After the contract ends or before the contractor shall restore the area to its
original condition after receiving written notice from the employer, and will
hand over to their owners free of all equipment and raw materials and different
materials.
1-14 ACCESS WAY TO THE SITE
The contractor shall examine the roads that will lead to the sites, so be aware of
and satisfied with their suitability for the transfer of units with heavy equipment
and perform all work necessary to keep them suitable for use in good condition.

The contractor's areas for storing raw materials, equipment and vehicles and the
establishment of temporary buildings in places approved by the Engineer.

The contractor is responsible for providing security in the areas of work, and he
has to take all measures necessary to protect materials and equipment from loss,
damage and stolen.
1-15 SUPPLYING SANITARY ACCOMMODATION:
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at approved locations on site,
adequate sanitary facilities during the overall period of construction of the
works, and for all persons engaged in the execution of the works. The sanitary
accommodation shall be kept in a clean and orderly condition to the approval of
the Engineer and to ensure that no nuisance is caused by release of any bad

-7-
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

odors. The Contractor shall construct either sewage storage chambers as


required and dispose of sewage from all storage chambers from time to time or
septic sewage disposal arrangements, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
shall remove them on completion of works.

The Contractor shall ensure that all his employees understand the dangers of
pollution and make proper use of the facilities provided.
1-16 MEANS OF FIRST AID
Contractor will prepare and maintain adequate equipment for first aid in
accordance with the adoption of Engineer, in order to work for the first aid
workers, as well as for an engineer, and all costs are considered necessary in the
categories covered by the contract.
1-17 SITE CLEARING AND CLEANING
The contractor is responsible during the period of the project to remain all site
areas clean and safe, and that the order of its raw materials properly, and must
be moved all the waste and scrap and debris and the like on a regular basis, from
the site areas, the more accumulated and deposited at collection points generally
determined by the Engineer in preparation for the transfer of sites.
1-18 PROTECTION FROM INSECTS
The Contractor shall maintain all offices, cafeteria labors and camps clean from
insects and what might be necessary to secure the prevention of insects.
1-19 ELECTRICITY AT SITE
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for electricity supplies and
shall be entitled to use electric supply as may be available on site for the
purpose of work and shall pay any expenses and prices prevailing for such use,
all the costs shall be at his own expense
1-20 SITE WATER SUPPLY
The Contractor shall supply clean water according to standards, for the works,
and shall supply all temporary plumbing pipe work and storage tanks that may
be required to be fed from the permanent wells and existing water distribution
system or the availability thereof. The Contractor shall pay all fees for
connection and all charges for water consumed, including water used for
tightness tests for water structures and pipes. In the event of a water supply not
being readily available at the site, the Contractor shall be required at his own
expense to transport water to the site by tankers or other means
1-21 SIGN BOARDS
The site sign board should be constructed from supported post fixed in to the
ground and sign sheets rested on rigid skeleton, all work details including
signs locations & positions should be submitted to the Engineer for approval
before manufacturing & construction , adequate lighting should be provided to

-8-
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

the signs with standard engineering good specification & approved by the
engineer. The following items should be included in the contract
1. locate of sign board in the site location and contains the follows
a. project title and location as per contract
b. contractor name
c. The date of notifying the contractor awarding of the project
d. The date of contract signature
e. Contract value
f. Date of site receiving
g. The scheduled date project and handling
h. Extension time & the date of extension starting & end(if found)
i. The name of consultant who supervise on the contract execution
j. Consultant contract value
2. The sign board size should be not less than 3X4 m2 and prefabricated
from climate resist material with proper fixation way
3. All data on project sign board should be clear and readable from long
distance
4. Site sign board should be fixed in noticeable place and for water or
drainage net work, road , rain drainage project whitch extend to a long
distances one site sign board should be in the starting of the project and
another one in the end with additional one at the middle
1-22 ZERO LEVEL
Contractor shall be responsible before the start of work at site to determine the
zero level for the site, and the contractor creates a secondary point of placing
each part of the work.
1-23 PROTECTION AND REMOVE THE WATER FROM SITE WORKS
The Contractor shall maintain all work dry from water, and get rid from water
away from site.

And the contractor that the establishment and operation and maintenance of all
temporary works for the disposal of water, such as channels and pumps that
include business and points of wells (Well Point) for the dewatering of the
business during implementation. And so as not to continue all this work without
the approval of the Engineer, regardless of the approval of the Engineer any
such arrangements for dewatering, Contractor shall be responsible for the
efficiency of this business, so the business can be a safe and dry at all times,
especially in cases of floods, and by the repair of all structural parts of the work,
including the resulting floods and at his own expense.
1-24 MATERIAL SAMPLES
Prior to ordering or delivering any materials or manufactured items to the Site,
the name and address of the supplier(s) and, where required by the Engineer,
adequate samples, schedules and manufacturer's certificates of all the materials
and goods to be used in the Works shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval at no extra cost to the Project.

-9-
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

In case of rejections further samples, until final approval is accorded, shall be


submitted. The Contractor shall have no claims to extra cost or time lost due to
improper submissions, the resultant rejections and the approval process.
If considered necessary and ordered by the Engineer, the samples shall be tested
for compliance at the Contractor's expense in a laboratory approved by the
Engineer.
1-25 TESTING MATERIALS AND WORKMAN SHIP:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the sampling, storage, transportation and
laboratory testing of products and materials as required in the Specification.
The Contractor shall make available on site necessary equipment for the use of
the Engineer for tests to be conducted at site.

The Contractor shall allow for the costs of the above in his unit rates.
In addition, suitable experienced labor to carry out the operations in connection
with the above shall be provided by the Contractor as required by the Engineer.
1-26 FENCING, LIGHTING, SECURITY AND TRAFFIC PRECAUTIONS:
Contractor is responsible for taking all necessary measures to implement the
work of fencing, lighting and security for all the work at day or night for the
protection and safety, in addition to the lights and warning signs necessary,
especially in the streets, no houses populated, but in case of need to stop the
traffic altogether, For the contractor in advance to get the necessary permission
from the competent authority.

In all cases, and the responsibility of the contractor he has to, that installs a
sufficient number of lights fixed and the lights dotted with red color and signals
work light when you cannot view both at day or night, as well as providing a
number of guards and the organizers of traffic, and bears full responsibility
towards any accident that may happen to the pedestrian because of it.

Also, it at the end of the business, that the removal of all fences other that there
is no longer needing it, to considerations of security and not to disrupt traffic,
and if called upon considerations of security, the Contractor has to satisfy
Engineer with regard to the requirements of the Traffic Department and the
Health Authority and by placing banners instructions and warning sites for
business, in addition to the lights and warning signals between sunset and
sunrise and other times, which cannot be the vision.
1-27 ROADS CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor's drawings, which illustrate the paths and tracks as well as the
available data on the location and nature of the cables, as well as other facilities
which might hinder the course of business and takes the approval of the
competent authorities before starting the excavation work in the streets.
Contractor is responsible for locating all utilities and facilities in place to avoid

- 10 -
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Special Conditions of The Tender)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

damage, but if the damage occurred, it bears the necessary reforms.

Contractor shall identify and install the right of passage by the way, and the
offer accepted by the Engineer. And he has to do all the work of cleaning and
preparing the ground for the work of the contract in accordance with these
technical specifications, and the area that is cleaned is that space on the
drawings to be determined by the Engineer.

Processes include cleaning and removal of specific areas and waste all the trees
and the remains of roots and rocks and all other materials, as well as include the
removal of buildings that hinder business.
Contractor will not be worth any extra money in case he removes any rocks
during offset by removals and settlement of the surface to determine the right of
way.
The Contractor shall promptly repair all well-defined paths, which caused the
destruction during the implementation of its business.
1-28 PRIMARY SUBMISSION
Will release the minutes are not taken delivery Primary unless the completion of
all contract works and submit the plans by implementation at the discs in
addition to paper copies.

The duration of the project is twelve months, and which the Contractor shall be
responsible for the maintenance of parts of the project, and shall bear any costs
to repair the defective parts. And ensures that the contractor carried out his
knowledge of the business you work best during this period, and accepted all the
requirements mentioned, and this period begins from the date of the end of the
business and the issuance of the minute’s Primary delivery.

The part that replaces as a result of implementation flaws during this period for
renewed guarantee from the date of repair.

- 11 -
CHAPTER 2
TECHNICAL DATA AND
WORK DESCRIPTION
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Data and Work Description)
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

CHAPTER 2
TECHNICAL DATA AND WORK DESCRIPTION

2-1 THE PURPOSE OF THE PROJECT:


The general Directorate of water at Asir region in the implementation of
strategic tanks of drinking water for the urban area of Abha – First stage.

2-2 THE PROPOSED PROJECT:


The project proposed to establish the number of eight tanks of structural steel
capacity of each 30000 m3, and all road works and networks necessary and
buildings attached to the building of the chlorination room guard and the control
room and the walls of the interior of the clamp and external Precast Concrete on
the site as well as the work of control (SCADA SYSTEM).

- 13 -
CHAPTER 3
Technical Specification for Water and
Sewage Pipelines Works
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

CHAPTER 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR WATER AND SEWAGE PIPELINE

3-1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


3-1-1 METHOD OF NUMBERING AND CROSS – REFERENCE TO THE
SPECIFICATIONS.
3-1-1-1 METHOD OF NUMBERING
A- Part
A-1 This specification is divided into several parts, each part was given a number or a
number followed by two numbers, such as the title of Part (Part 1 - General
Requirements).

B- Section
B-1 Section of each part into sections. And reference was made to each section part
number with a line break and then a number or two numbers in a row, then the
section title as follows (section 3.1.1: A method of numbering and cross-reference for
the specification).
C- Subsection
C-1 Of each section was divided into sub-sections. With reference to each sub-section part
number with a line break and then a number or a digital section with a line break and
then a number or two numbers after it, followed by the title of this sub-section as
follows (3-1-1-1: A method of numbering).
D- A key paragraph
D-1 Can be divided into each subdivision can be divided into a number of paragraphs. And
give each paragraph characters alphabetically consecutive one with a line break.
E- Item
E.1. Each paragraph can be divided into a number of items, with the definition of each
item alphabetical letter followed by a line and then a number or two numbers of
the item, followed by (if you must) address of the
printable characters smaller. Usually, follow the text on the same line.
3-1-1-2 REFERENCE ATTRIBUTION
A- Specifications identified items in the bills of quantities and in each section /
sections corresponding to the type of business involved.
B- All the terms and conditions of this section / sections must be interpreted as a
specification for such items of business, except for those provisions which can never
be applied substance contained therein, or unless they are the subject of prejudice
or waiver or modification in the contract documents or under the orders of different
and / or change.
C- Can contain specifications and diagrams on the cross-reference to other of the other
sections, or paragraphs items, etc ... Which must also be taken, such
as specifications of the items of work intended.

14
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

D- Any references in the specifications to work or materials not required are not
applicable.

3-1-2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS OF TERMS


3-1-2-1 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Interpretation
A.1 Wherever the following abbreviations of titles, terms and units of measurement are
used in the Specifications or on the Drawings, the intent and meaning shall be
interpreted as described hereunder.
B. Titles and Terms
B.1 AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:
ACI : American Concrete Institute
AISC : American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI : American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI : American National Standards Institute
API : American Petroleum Institute
ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials
BS : British Standard
CBR : The proportion of California for download (for soil).
AWWA : American Water Works Association.
CONC : concrète
DIN : Deutsches Institute Fur Normalizieung
Equiv : equivalent
hwy : highway
ht : height
H:V : horizontal: vertical
ISO : International Organization for Standardization
L.L. : liquid limit
L.S. : lump sum
max : maximum
min : minimum (or minute)
pav't : pavement
P.C. : prime cost
PCC : Portland cement concrete
PE : polyethylene
P.I. : plasticity index
P.L. : plastic limit
PVC : Polyvinyl chloride
qty : quantity
RC : reinforced concrete
RCP : reinforced concrete pipe
rdwy : roadway
ROW : right-of-way
SBSC : single bituminous seal coat
S.G. : specific gravity
SI : Systeme International D'Unites

15
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Sta : Station (location along a survey line)


TBSC : triple bituminous seal coat
uPVC : Polyvinyl chloride non born
WGT : weight
GRP : Class reinforced plastic
DI : Ductile Iron
SASO : Saudi Arabia Standards Organization

C. Units of Measurement
C.1 Throughout the documentation units of measurement are referred to by symbols as
follows:
Nr : number
mm : millimeter/s
cm : centimeter/s
m : meter/s
lin.m : linear meter/s
km : kilometer/s
sq.mm : square millimeter/s
sq.cm : square centimeter/s
sq.m : square meter/s
Ha : hectare/s
cu.m : cubic meter/s
gm : gram/s
kg : kilogram/s
tone : metric ton (1,000 kg)
ml : milliliter/s
ltr : liter/s
Pa : Pascal/s
N : Newton/s
kN : kilo Newtons
MN : mega Newtons
A : amperes
mA : milli amperes
V : volt/s
W : Watt
kW : kilowatt
C : Celsius (Centigrade)
Hz : Hertz (Frequency)
rpm : revolutions per minute
km/h : kilometers per hour
sec : seconds

16
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

min : minute/s (or minimum)


Hur : hour/s
dB : decibel/s
in. : inch/inches (1 in. = 25.4 mm)
ft : foot/feet (1ft = 0.3048 m)
sq.in : square inch/inches
sq.ft : square foot/feet
cu.ft : cubic foot/feet
lb. : pound/s (weight)
psi : pounds per square inch
gal : gallon/s (U.S.)
gal(Imp) : gallon/s (Imperial)
mph : miles per hour
HP : horsepower
3-1-2-2 DEFINITIONS
A. Wherever in the specification or in other Contract Documents any of the following
terms is used, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as follows:
 ACCEPTED - Accepted in writing by the Engineer (or by the Employer where
appropriate) as meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and of any
authorized variations thereto. "Acceptance" means accepted in writing as
aforesaid. "Acceptable" means acceptable to the Engineer as aforesaid.
 ADDENDUM/NOTICE - Amendment of or revision to any of the Contract
Documents issued to Tenderers, and which is deemed to form part of the Contract
Documents.
 APPROVED - Approved in writing by the Engineer, including subsequent written
approval or confirmation of previous verbal approval by the Engineer. "Approval"
means approval in writing as aforesaid.
 CERTIFICATE OF GUARANTEE - A signed statement by a person having legal
authority to bind a company or supplier to its product, and which confirms that the
materials and test results conform to the standards of these Specifications.
 DIRECTED - Directed in writing by the Engineer, including subsequent written
direction or confirmation of previous verbal direction by the Engineer.
 PRESPLITTING - Establishment of a free surface, or shear plane, in rock cuts, by
controlled use of explosives in specially aligned and closely spaced drill holes
along the slope line.
 SHEATHING - Backfilling to the inside faces of structures such as retaining
walls and abutments, using proprietary filter cloth and porous blocks, or using
selected, free-draining material such as gravel or non-cementitious sand, etc, prior
to placing and compacting normal backfill.
 SOIL STABILIZATION - Procedure whereby cement, bitumen or lime is added to
soils (sub grade layer) or to granular materials (sub-base course) in order to
improve their load bearing capacity and their resistance to weathering and
displacement.
 SUBGRADE - The top surface of embankment or excavated area on which the
pavement structure and shoulders are constructed. Also referred to as Sub grade

17
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Surface or Sub grade Level.


 SUBGRADE LAYER - The top layer of material, of at least 200 mm compacted
thickness, immediately below the sub grade surface.
 SUBSIDIARY WORKS - Works which are subsidiary to or necessary or essential
to, or in support of, or usual to, the execution and completion of other Works.
 WORKING DRAWINGS - Shop drawings, steel bending schedules, stress sheets,
fabrication and erection drawings, false work drawings, and any other
supplementary drawings or data which the Contractor is required to submit to the
Engineer for approval, generally before such Works commence.

3-1-3 SCOPE AND CONTROL OF WORKS


3-1-3-1 INTENT OF CONTRACT
A. The intent of the Contract is to provide for the construction and completion in every
detail and subsequent maintenance of the Works described. The Contractor shall
furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation, supplies and facilities and
shall carry out all Permanent and Temporary Works and all other items necessary for
proper completion of the Works in accordance with all requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Where the Specifications or Drawings describe any portions of the Works in outline
only, and not in complete detail, the best general engineering practice shall prevail and
only first quality materials and workmanship shall be used.
3-1-3-2 SILENCE OF SPECIFICATIONS
A. The apparent silence of the Specifications, Drawings or other Contract Documents as
to any detail or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning
any Works or requirements, shall be regarded as meaning that good engineering
practice shall apply and shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
3-1-3-3 CONTRACTOR'S WORK AREAS
A. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements, including payment if need be,
regarding any land outside the Site that may be needed as work areas. The Employer
will not acknowledge any liability in respect of such land. The Contractor shall also
be responsible for insuring that all roads and temporary facilities needed are sufficient
to divert traffic adequately.
B. The Contractor shall locate and select sites outside the right-of-way for the use of his
plant, equipment, site offices, residences, Temporary Works or any other uses which
are essential during the execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall take the
necessary measures for using these sites and shall be responsible for all expenses that
may become due in return for such use. Prior to using any land owned by public or
private owner outside the Site, the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the
concerned Authorities and the Engineer.
C. The Contractor, if so required by the Engineer, whether before or after completion of
the Works, shall remove his constructional plant and duly clean the site and shall,
wherever applicable, remedy all damage and pay all monies due to land owners in
return for using their land.
D. The Contractor shall inspect the location and the surrounding areas and comprehend
all the details related to the type, nature, details, topography and existing services of
the location.

18
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

The Contractor shall acquire all the information related to risks, dangers, weather
conditions and any other related factors that may influence his tender, and no later
consideration will be made since these expenses should be added by the Contractor on
the prices of works and other items.
3-1-3-4 WATER SUPPLY
A. The Contractor shall be deemed to have executed adequate investigations relating to
the availability of water for the purpose of the Works and to have consulted and
arranged with the appropriate Authorities and taken into consideration all legal
aspects. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of sufficient clean, fresh
water at all times during progress of the Works, including making temporary
arrangements for storing and distributing the water on the Site.
3-1-3-5 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
A. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of all electrical power
and all lighting and electrical equipment required for execution of the Works,
including supplies for commissioning engineering services and Plant at required
voltages. The Contractor shall also make provisions to store and distribute electrical
power and equipment on Site.
B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate efficient lighting for all parts of
the Works for safety and security purposes required to facilitate proper execution of
work and to illuminate surfaces during finishing work and inspection. Without
prejudice to his liability under the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor
shall, with respect to the supply of electricity for power or lighting, take all necessary
precautions to ensure the safety of his workmen and others.
C. Permanent electric supply and lighting installations may be used for testing and
commissioning and to illuminate the Works, subject to the following conditions:
 The Employer does not guarantee that it will be available.
 The Contractor must take responsibility for the operation, maintenance and
supervision of the system, indemnify the Employer against all damage and pay
all costs and renew all used tubes and lamps.
 The Contractor must indemnify the Employer against any reduction in the
manufacturer's guarantee periods for equipment etc. due to its use before
completion of the Works.
3-1-3-6 EXISTING UTILITIES AND OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS
A. Categories of Obstructions
A.1 Obstructions shall be classified as follows:
 Existing private and public owned utilities, above and below ground, which
are required to be either protected, adjusted, relocated or removed.
 Obstructions, above and below ground (other than utilities), which are required
to be taken down, dismantled, demolished or excavated, and removed, as
appropriate.
B. Existing Utilities
B.1 Utilities shall include, but not be limited to, existing water lines, gas lines, sewer lines,
wire lines, service connections, water and gas meters and valve boxes, light poles and
masts, pylons, cableways, signals, and all utility appurtenances within the limits of the
proposed construction.

19
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B.1.1 The Contractor shall submit all plans showing existing utilities under earth and their
relations with pipelines under construction.
B.1.2 The Employer/Engineer takes no responsibility as to the correctness, accuracy,
completeness or validity of information obtained from these Drawings and the
Contractor shall be fully responsible for his own interpretation and shall execute
whatever additional investigations are necessary to obtain the needed information at
the Contractor's own expense.
B.1.3 The costs of all related Works concerning verification and identification of existing
utilities including excavating any trial pits, detection means, mapping detailing of
drawings and co-ordination with respective Authorities shall be fully borne by the
Contractor. Should any relocation of existing utilities, not previously identified by the
Contractor, be instructed, or shown on the Drawings, these shall not constitute a
change in the Scope of Work, and shall give no grounds for extension to the Time for
Completion or for other claims. The relocations, however, will be paid for and valued
in accordance with the Contract rates..
B.2 The necessary utility diversions may be specified or directed to be carried out by the
Contractor. Alternatively, the Employer may make arrangements for such works to be
executed by other parties.
B.3 The Contractor shall:
 Take into account that the diversion works shall be carried out to the
requirements and approval of the Utility Owners and/or under their
supervision, and also where required by the Utility Owners, specialist
diversion works shall be carried out by accredited specialist Contractors.
 Verify and identify the existing utilities by excavating trial pits and other
measures including detection means existing utilities. Coordinate with the
relevant Authorities and map these utilities and prepare detailed and accurate
existing utilities drawings identifying the utilities that are in service and those
that are dead or abandoned. Submit these existing utilities Drawings, that are
accurate and detailed giving location of utilities in plan and section with all
pertinent data of the respective utility, to the Engineer and to the Utility
Owners.
 Work out and develop, in coordination with the Utility Owners and the
Engineer, the approved utilities diversion schemes that will be required to
enable the execution of the Works and also maintain continued utilities
services in the Area, and to the users.
 Provide superintendence for the execution of the utility diversions whether
they are carried out by the Contractor directly or by other parties employed by
the Contractor.
 Provide accurate As-Built Drawings of all permanent utility diversions that are
executed under the Contract.
B.4 The Employer will, in consultation with the Engineer and Contractor, coordinate with
all Utility Owners to ensure prompt adjustment, relocation or removal of all affected
utilities, including any additional utilities that may be encountered during the Works.
The Employer and Engineer will facilitate, to the maximum extent practicable, the
Contractor's Work Program, in this respect.
B.5 The Contractor shall take into account, in his Program of Work, the time effort
involved in the follow-up and execution of Works pertaining to all utility adjustments,
relocations and removals. The Contractor shall schedule construction activities so as

20
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

to avoid or minimize any potential delays, inconvenience or damage to the Works that
may result from utility interference or the operations of adjustment, relocations and
removals.
B.6 The Contractor shall follow up the execution of the utility diversions whether they are
carried out directly or by other parties employed by the Contractor or directly by the
Employer. The Contractor shall, in good time, inform the Employer and the Engineer.
B.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for safeguarding and protecting all utilities and
appurtenances encountered during the Works. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the costs of making good any damage arising out of its own negligence.
B.8 The execution of the utility diversions should be done by similar materials of
equivalent grade or strength as minimum to the materials of the existing utilities and
as per the Engineer approval and the utility owners requirements.
B.9 In case it is required to stop the water in the existing network while execution of the
utilities diversions or replacement of existing water pipeline, the Contractor should
inform the Engineer and coordinate with the water supply authorities in advance by 48
hours. If the water supply would stop for more than 48 hours, the Contractor should
provide temporary service for water supply on his own expenses, either using
temporary pipelines or by water tanker or any other way approved by the Engineer. In
all cases, the Contractor should get written license from the water supply authority
including the required instructions.
B.10 Execution of the water networks diversions should be done as per the water networks
specifications stipulated in Section (4) of these specifications. Testing, cleaning and
disinfection of the pipelines should be done according to Section (4-3-3) of these
specifications.
C. Obstacles
C.1 Obstacles shall include, but not limited to existing buildings, walls, fences, gates,
wells, septic tanks, manholes, pits, pipes, culverts, roadways, sidewalks, signs and
rubbish dumps, whether or not shown on the Drawings.
C.2 At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall examine the Site and
identify/verify all obstacles in the Site above or below ground, and shall record all
such information on suitable Site Drawings which shall be submitted to the Engineer
within one month of commencement date.
C.3 Existing Septic Tanks:
If the pipelines or the house connections cross any existing septic tanks and it was not
possible to change the pipeline routing to avoid them, the Contractor should proceed
to dry, clean, demolish and backfill those tanks partially or fully.
Wherever possible, only the crossing part of the tank with the water pipeline that will
be demolished and backfilled and the rest of the tank should be separated by building
a suitable wall to make the tank in a good working condition. All precautions should
be taken to keep the existing system working and to pump the sewerage from the tanks
and to dispose of the sewage according to the local authorities instructions. The sewer
water must not be allowed to leak to the water pipelines trenches or the water system.
In case of partial or full demolish, the top slab should be removed either fully or
partially and the walls should be lowered at least by 1m below the ground level.
Filling should be as per the backfilling specifications in this document.
All of the above requirements should be applied to all existing tanks including those
constructed during this pipelines contract and those crossing the pipelines.

21
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Harmful gases concentration should be monitored using special gas monitoring


devices before and during commencing of the work in septic tanks. All laborers
entering to the tanks must be provided with full safety tools and gas masks, etc. and
the Contractor must provide all first aid tools on site.
C.4 Change of Pipeline Rooting Around Tanks:
When existing tank crosses the proposed pipeline, the pipeline routing should be
changed if possible around the tank leaving a 50 cm clear distance between the tank
walls and the pipeline. Those pipelines should be covered by plain concrete as per the
Engineer recommendations.
The Contractor should prepare detailed drawings for the tank boundaries that cross the
pipeline, showing all the connection details that are required to relocate the pipe
around the tank. This drawing should be approved by the Engineer prior to
construction.
3-1-3-7 SIGN BOARDS
A. Name board: The Contractor shall provide suitably sized project name boards, bearing
the names of the Employer and Engineer together with any corresponding logos, the
name of the project, the name of the Contractor and such other names and information
as the Engineer may request. The design and style of the name board shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to fabrication. Name boards are to be
written in English and the local language and erected at suitable locations as directed
by the Engineer. Refer to Section 1.08.2 Item “G” for the name board details. As
detailed in Section 1.08.2, Item E of the specifications. Is written to the signs and
names in both Arabic and English and placed in the appropriate places as directed by
the Engineer.
B. Each sign board shall be erected in a prominent, approved position. Sign boards shall
be maintained in good order at all times and sign boards and supports shall be
dismantled and removed from the site upon completion of the Works.
C. All sign boards are to comply with the requirements of concerned authorities
(Municipality/ Ministry of Transport/Traffic Directorate).
3-1-3-8 SURVEYING EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide sufficient and suitable surveying instruments and other
equipment for his own use in setting out and leveling of the Works, and also to enable
the Engineer to check the setting out. Furthermore, the Contractor shall provide
sufficient chainmen and other assistance as the Engineer may require.
B. The accuracy of survey instruments may be verified at any time by the Engineer and
any unsatisfactory instruments shall be promptly calibrated or removed and replaced
by the Contractor at its own expense.
C. Upon completion of the Contract, all survey instruments shall remain the property of
the Contractor, unless a Pay Item for such instruments is included in the Bills of
Quantities, in which case the instruments shall become the property of the Employer.
3-1-3-9 SETTING OUT OF WORKS
A. The Contractor shall, prior to any setting out, submit a planned method of operations
for setting out the Works to the Engineer for his approval. The plan shall include the
accuracy, positions of the various types of stakes, method of marking stakes, and
methods to be used for protecting stakes, etc. No survey work shall proceed without
to the Engineer's approval of the Contractor's plan.

22
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B. The Contractor shall give written notice to the Engineer at least 24 hours before he
intends to survey any portion of the Works. Such notice shall include the time,
location and type of Works to be set out.
C. Before commencing Work on Site, the Contractor shall carry out a topographical
survey of the Site, as directed by the Engineer. This survey shall include such parts of
the Site as the Engineer may direct, to record the Site limits, dimensions, ground
levels, obstructions and other features and the survey shall establish base lines and
points for future setting out and also record the basis for re-measurement of
excavation and earthwork, where applicable. The Contractor shall set out the Works,
inform the Engineer when setting out is complete and obtain Engineer's approval
before proceeding with construction. The Contractor shall provide instruments and
assistance for checking the setting out if required by the Engineer. If, in the opinion of
the Engineer, modification of the lines or grade is required, before or after survey, the
Engineer will issue detailed instructions to the Contractor who shall revise the setting
out accordingly.
D. Setting Out Utility Works shall be as shown on the Drawings or as instructed on Site.
Stake-out shall be revised if, in the opinion of the Engineer, modifications of line or
grade are required.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for preserving all existing stakes, marks and
monuments and if any construction stakes or marks are destroyed or disturbed, the
Contractor shall replace them at his own expense.
E.1 Record Drawings: The Contractor shall record details of all grid lines, existing ground
levels, setting-out stations, bench marks and profiles on the site setting-out drawing.
This drawing shall be retained on the Site throughout the duration of the Contract and
handed over to the Engineer upon completion of the Works.
E.2 All dimensions and levels on the Drawings and the Site, shall be checked particularly
the correlation between components and the work in place. Materials and components
shall not be ordered, or work carried out, until discrepancies have been resolved with
the Engineer.
E.3 Appearance and Fit: The Works shall be constructed to higher levels of accuracy than
those specified where it is necessary to achieve a desired appearance and also to
ensure that materials, elements, and components of the building fit together as
designed. Wherever the accuracy, fit or appearance of the work is likely to be critical,
or difficult to achieve, the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of proposals
or of the partially finished work as early as possible.
E.4 Non-Compliance: Work which fails to meet the specified levels of accuracy must not
be rectified before the Contractor submits and receives approval of proposed
rectification works. All additional costs resulting from these rectification works shall
be borne by the Contractor.

3-1-3-10 HAUL ROUTES FOR HEAVY VEHICLES


A. The Contractor shall prepare proposals for routes to be used by heavy vehicles
particularly for hauling fill materials. Routes shall where possible, avoid existing
roads and built-up areas. Signs shall be provided and maintained to direct
construction traffic to and from haul routes. Details of haul routes and signing shall be
submitted to the concerned in Traffic Directorate for approval within a period not
exceeding one month prior to the commencement of the Works in the relevant area
and the signs shall be erected prior to actual commencement of the Works. If and
where it is necessary for Contractor's plant or vehicles to cross public highways, and

23
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

where required by the Engineer, all such crossings shall be equipped with manually
controlled traffic lights.
B. Stationary vehicles, equipment, huts, stockpiles of materials, etc., shall be kept well
clear of crossing points so that persons using the highway and the haul road shall have
adequate sight distance at all times.

3-1-3-11 SCAFFOLDING AND FALSEWORK


A. The Contractor shall provide scaffolding and false work to facilitate carrying out
construction of the Works in the required sequence. Scaffolding and false work shall
be properly designed and constructed specifically for the loads intended. Full details
of the proposed arrangements shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval.
Such approval, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility with
regard to the adequacy of all scaffolding and false work used in the Works.
3-1-3-12 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
A. Control Measures
A.1 The Contractor shall not use explosives without the express permission from the
controlling Authority. The Contractor shall abide by all rules and regulations of the
concerned Authorities regarding purchasing, transportation, storing, handling and
using the explosive materials.
A.2 Explosives and detonators shall be stored in special buildings as approved by the
concerned Authorities. These secured buildings should be located and clearly marked
English and Arabic "DANGER - EXPLOSIVES" as approved by the concerned
authorities. Explosives and detonators shall be stored in separate buildings.
A.3 All possible precautions shall be taken against accidental fire or explosion, and to
ensure that the explosives and detonators are kept in proper and safe condition.
A.4 Explosives and detonators shall always be transported in separate vehicles and kept
apart until the last possible moment. Metallic tools shall not be used to open boxes of
explosives.
B. Blasting Procedures
B.1 Ensure that blasting shall only be carried out by experienced shot firers. Priming,
charging, stemming and shot firing shall be carried out with greatest regard for safety
and in strict accordance with the Rules and Regulations of the concerned Authorities.
Adequate warning of blasting shall always be given and all persons cleared from the
area, before blasting takes place.
B.2 Ensure that police and other concerned Authorities shall be kept fully informed of the
blasting program so that they may be present when blasting takes place if they so
require.
B.3 Ensure that explosive charges are not excessive, charged boreholes are properly
protected, and proper precautions are taken for the safety of persons and property.
Only the Contractor shall be responsible of people and premises full protection.
C. Explosives Inventory
C.1 The Contractor shall maintain an up-to-date inventory of all explosives and explosive
devices and shall submit a monthly report to the Engineer, detailing the use of all
explosives by date and location.
3-1-3-13 FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to prevent personal injury or death or

24
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

damage to the Works or other property and adequate, fully operational fire fighting
equipment shall be furnished and maintained by the Contractor whose workmen shall
be trained in the operation of such equipment.
B. Fire figVhting arrangements shall be made as required by the local Civil Defence
Department and provision of fire fighting facilities in all vulnerable areas and as
instructed by the Engineer.
C. Adequate water for fire fighting shall be available and outlets located so as to be
readily accessible.
D. All equipment shall be regularly tested and properly maintained.
3-1-3-14 PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDS OF CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall submit each month good quality progress photographs of at least
5 different subjects as agreed by the Engineer. For each subject, the Contractor shall
supply progress photographs taken from approved locations stations but not less than
20 (twenty) at monthly intervals and submit 3 color prints (gloss finish) not less than
size 16 cm x 20 cm of each negatives and color transparency.
B. Each print and transparency supplied shall be titled and referenced to a suitable key
plan. Prints and negatives shall also be suitably cross referenced.
3-1-3-15 SITE CLEANING AND FINAL CLEAN UP
A. Site Cleaning During Progress of Works
A.1 All parts of the Site, and adjacent roads affected by the Works, shall be maintained in
a clean and tidy condition during progress of the Works. All waste and surplus
materials and other rubbish resulting from the Works or otherwise, shall be cleared
away to locations approved by the Municipalities and Directorate at intervals as
directed by the Engineer.
A.2 If the Contractor fails to remove any surplus or waste materials from the Site within 3
days after being instructed to do so by the Engineer, these materials may be removed
by others at the Contractor's expense.
B. Final Clean Up on Completion
B.1 The entire Site shall be delivered up on completion of the Works, in a clean, neat and
presentable condition, all as specified hereunder and as described in the General
Conditions of Contract.
B.2 Spoil tips, borrow pits and deposited materials shall be trimmed and regularized to
profiles and levels as directed. Flow of water courses affected by the tips or pits shall
be maintained without interruption and any agreement concerning these sites, existing
between the Employer and the persons or Authorities concerned, shall be observed.
B.3 Temporary Markings coverings and protective wrappings shall be removed unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
B.4 Partial Possession by Employer: Where the Works are to be completed in sections, and
any such section depends for its adequate functioning on work located elsewhere on
the Site, such other work shall be completed in time to permit sectional completion as
required.

3-1-4 TEMPORARY WORKS


3-1-4-1 SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall construct, as required, all temporary detour roads, temporary
bridges and culverts, and other facilities for his Works or for maintenance of traffic in

25
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

locations affected by his works.


B. The Contractor shall construct and maintain all detour routes ensuring at all times that
the detour routes are signed, striped, lighted, maintained and furnished with all traffic
control devices as shown, directed and/or needed. These proposed detours must be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
C. Trench crossings are to be provided for free and safe passage of vehicles and
pedestrians over pipe and other trenches.
3-1-4-2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Designs and detailed working drawings for proposed Temporary Works shall be
submitted for approval, prior to commencing such Works. The Contractor shall be
held responsible for any damage that may result from the Temporary Works.
3-1-4-3 GREEMENT OF PROPERTY OWNERS
A. The Contractor shall obtain the agreement of the affected land owners and approval
from the Engineer prior to commencing Temporary Works. Such approval shall not in
any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities expressed in the General
Conditions of Contract.

3-1-5 CONTROL OF MATERIALS AND STANDARDS FOR SAMPLING AND


TESTING
3-1-5-1 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be so stored as to assure the preservation of their quality and suitability
for the Works. Stored materials, approved before storage, may again be inspected
prior to their use in the Works. Stored materials shall be located so as to facilitate
their prompt inspection.
B. Where materials are stockpiled on Government or private property, such sites shall be
abandoned immediately upon consumption of all stockpiled materials and the natural
surface shall be restored as far as practicable to the original condition by the
Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3-1-5-2 HANDLING MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be handled in such manner as to preserve their quality and
suitability for the Works.
3-1-5-3 MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY EMPLOYER
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials furnished by the Employer and
shall make good any shortages or deficiencies, from any cause whatsoever, or any
damage which may occur, after delivery of such materials.
3-1-5-4 LOCAL MATERIAL SOURCES
A. When material sources are not designated on the Drawings, or in other documents, the
Contractor shall be responsible for locating and providing suitable materials from
approved sources.
B. Any information provided in the tender documents about sources of local materials is
considered as a guideline only and does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
in respect of investigation and supply of suitable materials as specified.
C. Materials, regardless of their source, shall not be incorporated in the Works until
approved by the Engineer.

26
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

3-1-5-5 SOURCES OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


A. All materials, including manufactured articles, and machinery incorporated in the
Works, shall meet all specified quality requirements and be approved by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall, before placing any purchase order for any materials intended for
incorporation in the Works, submit for approval a complete description of all such
materials, names of the firms from whom he proposes to purchase them and copies of
all test reports verifying conformity with the provisions of the Specifications.
Materials shall not be ordered without the approval of the Engineer. When directed by
the Engineer or otherwise specified, the Contractor shall submit suitable samples for
approval.
C. The Engineer shall have the right to retest all materials which have been tested and
accepted at the source of supply after delivery to the Site and prior to incorporation
into the Works and to reject any such materials which are clearly defective or, when
retested, do not conform with the Specifications.
3-1-5-6 CERTIFICATES OF GUARANTEE AND PRODUCTION PLANT
INSPECTIONS
A. All shipments of materials shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Origin and a
Manufacturer's Certificate of Guarantee or Test Certificate from an approved
independent qualified laboratory approved by the Engineer. All certified materials
delivered to the Site shall undergo additional laboratory testing if required by the
Engineer.
B. Issuance of an invalid or erroneous Certificate of Guarantee shall be just cause for
rejection of the materials without further testing.
3-1-5-7SAMPLING AND TESTING PROCEDURES
A. Sampling
A.1 Samples of all materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for inspection, testing and
acceptance before incorporation in the Works. All materials being used will be
subject to inspection, testing, or rejection at any time prior to such incorporation.
A.2 Where untested and unaccepted materials have been used without approval of the
Engineer, such use shall be at the Contractor's risk.
B. Source Tests
B.1 All source samples shall be taken by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer,
using approved sampling procedures. All source approval tests shall be performed
under the supervision of the Engineer or, when so specified, by an independent
laboratory approved by the Engineer and engaged by the Contractor.
B.2 After approval of any source of materials, the Contractor shall produce from such
source only to the extent that materials produced are of substantially the same quality
as the approved samples.
B.3 The Engineer will periodically order retesting of previously approved sources to verify
that they continue to conform to the Specifications and may order retesting at the same
or at a different laboratory from the one performing the original source approval tests.
If retesting indicates that a previously approved source no longer conforms with the
Specifications, the Contractor shall forthwith cease production from such source.
C. Job Control Tests
C.1 Job control tests shall be performed by the Contractor prior to submitting any
materials to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall submit details to the

27
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Engineer of his job control testing program.


C.2 The Engineer may declare the Contractor's job control testing program unacceptable if
frequent rejections of submitted materials occur when subjected to the Project Control
Tests.
D. Project Control Tests
D.1 All Project Control samples shall be taken jointly by the Engineer and the Contractor.
Tests shall be performed in the Site Laboratory, or in situ as appropriate, under the
supervision of the Engineer.
D.2 The Engineer may order retesting of any material if there has been a significant delay
in the construction operations or if he determines that the material has deteriorated
since its original acceptance. Material which does not conform with the Specifications
will be rejected and shall be removed from the Works and replaced or corrected by the
Contractor. The Engineer may order additional testing to ascertain the extent of
unacceptable material.
E. Check Tests
E.1 The Engineer may periodically order check tests to verify the accuracy of Project
Control testing and equipment. The Engineer may direct that check tests be performed
by qualified persons other than those normally responsible for Project Control testing,
or he may direct that the samples be sent to the Employer's Central laboratory or to an
approved independent laboratory for testing.
E.2 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all necessary Test Report forms and
expendable materials required to perform all required tests. Copies of all test results
will be issued to the Contractor.
3-1-5-8 SAMPLING AND TESTING STANDARDS
A. Standards to be Supplied
A.1 The Contractor shall, at the commencement of the Contract, furnish for use on site by
the Engineer and the Contractor one complete set of the following standards. The set
shall become the property of the Contractor upon completion of the Works.
A.1.1 AASHTO Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials and Methods of
Sampling and Testing (Part I: Specifications, and Part II: Tests).
A.1.2 ASTM Standards for Testing and Materials: Section 00 plus all Volumes in Sections 1
to 6 inclusive, plus Specifications, as required, from Sections 7 to 15 inclusive.
A.1.3 British Standards referred to in the Specification
A.1.4 SASO Standards.
A.1.5 DIN
A.1.6 ISO
A.1.7 All other relevant Standards referred to in the Specifications.
B. Precedence of Materials and Testing Specifications
B.1 All references to methods of testing or specifications of AASHTO, ASTM and others
will be deemed to refer to the latest methods of testing as specified in the Contract
Documents.
B.2 Unless otherwise specified, AASHTO methods of sampling and testing shall be
adopted where available. In the case of absence of an appropriate AASHTO
specification, the ASTM or BS specification shall govern.
3-1-5-9 UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS

28
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

A. All materials not conforming to the requirements of the Specifications at the time they
are used will be rejected and shall be removed immediately from the Site unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
B. No rejected material, the defects of which have been corrected, shall be used until
approval has been given.

3-1-6 CONTRACTOR'S PLANT AND EQUIPMENT


3-1-6-1 GENERAL
A. Plant and equipment used on the Works shall be of sufficient size and in such
mechanical condition as to meet the requirements of the Specifications and shall be
available for use when required by the Engineer. The Engineer may order removal
and replacement of unsatisfactory plant or equipment.
B. Wherever plant or equipment of a particular size or type is specified, the Contractor
may request permission to use an alternative type in place of that specified. In such
cases, the Contractor shall furnish evidence to the Engineer, before approval is given,
that the production of the plant or equipment proposed is at least equal to that of the
specified type.
3-1-6-2 CONTRACTOR'S SCHEDULE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall submit together with his Tender, a detailed schedule of the
numbers and types of plant and equipment which he proposes to utilize on Site to
carry out the Works. The schedule shall contain full details for each item, including
type, manufacturer, model, identification number, year of manufacture, number of
years in use, and, for all new and previously used items, the manufacturer's brochures,
catalogues and specifications.
3-1-6-3PROVISION AND USE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish all plant and equipment listed in his Schedule and
necessary for construction of each phase of the Works. Such plant and equipment
shall be delivered to the Site, inspected, and approved by the Engineer prior to
commencement of the particular phase of the Works for which it is intended. Any
plant or equipment, or part thereof, which becomes excessively worn or defective shall
be promptly repaired or replaced, as required by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall not remove from the Site any approved plant or equipment
without the permission of the Engineer.

3-1-7 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES


3-1-7-1GENERAL
A. All Works shall be measured net and in accordance with of the General Conditions of
Contract. All units of measurement shall be in the Metric System, unless specified
otherwise.
B. The method of measurement and computations to be used in determining quantities of
materials furnished and of Works performed shall be as defined in the Method of
Measurement.
C. All field measurements of quantities for monthly certificates and for final payment
shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. Original copies of
the field measurement notes, signed by the Contractor, will be retained by the
Engineer.

29
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

D. If the Contractor fails to measure any Pay Items, the Engineer may, at his discretion,
estimate quantities of such items for the monthly Payment Certificate or recommend
that no payment be made for the Items not measured and quantities not computed until
it is measured.
3-1-7-2MANUFACTURED ITEMS
A. Whenever standard manufactured items are specified, such as fence wire, plates, rolled
shapes, pipe conduit, etc. and these items are identified by gauge, unit weight, section
dimensions, etc., such identifications shall be deemed to be nominal weights or
dimensions. Unless controlled by tolerances in cited specifications, manufacturing
tolerances established by the industries involved may be accepted by the Engineer at
the recommendation of the Concerned Authorities.
3-1-7-3 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. When any Items are shown on the Drawings or specified as requiring miscellaneous
fittings and accessories for which no separate measurement is provided, the Pay Item
will be deemed to include for all such fittings and accessories.
3-1-7-4 WEIGHT MEASUREMENTS
A. All materials which are to be measured or proportioned by weight shall be weighed on
accurate and approved scales by competent and qualified personnel, at locations
designated or approved by the Engineer.

3-1-7-5 LINEAR AND AREA MEASUREMENTS


A. All items which are to be measured by linear meter shall be measured parallel to the
base or foundation upon which such items are placed, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
B. Unless otherwise specified, longitudinal measurements for area computations shall be
made horizontally and no deductions shall be made for fixtures with an area less than
one sq.m. Transverse measurements for area computations shall be the neat
dimensions shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.
C. No measurements shall be made of rolled down or sloping edges of bituminous
courses.

3-1-7-6 VOLUME MEASUREMENTS IN VEHICLES


A. Materials to be measured by volume in the hauling vehicle shall be hauled in approved
type vehicles and measured therein at the point of delivery. Vehicles for this purpose
may be of any size or type approved by the Engineer, provided that the body is of such
shape that the actual contents may be readily and accurately determined. All vehicles
shall be loaded to their level capacity and the Engineer may require loads to be
releveled when the vehicles arrive at the point of delivery.
B. When requested by the Contractor and if approved by the Engineer, material specified
to be measured by the cu. m. may be weighed and such weights will be converted to
cu. m. for payment purposes. Factors for conversion from weight measurement to
volume measurement will be determined by mutual agreement between the Engineer
and the Contractor, if no agreement is obtained, the factors will be determined by the
Engineer and shall be accepted by the Contractor.

3-1-7-7 EARTHWORK VOLUME MEASUREMENTS

30
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

A. The quantities of excavation paid for under the Contract unit prices shall be limited to
the lines shown on the Drawings and on approved cross sections. Excavation beyond
lines shown on approved cross sections shall not be paid for unless approved by the
Engineer. Excavation in excess of approved cross sections will be measured for
payment only in the case of unstable or unsuitable materials ordered by the Engineer
to be removed.
B. The Engineer will adjust the angle of slopes for cuts and fills as the Works proceed
and make determinations of the appropriate slope angles following his evaluation of
soil conditions in case there is a change in the type of the soil. The actual slopes of
the cuts as constructed shall be measured and recorded by the Contractor. The
Engineer will check these records and, if satisfactory, will approve the measurements
as a basis for payment.
C. Within 60 days of the date of field survey, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for his approval, plots of the original and final earthwork cross sections together with
the area and volumetric earthwork computations. The Contractor's cross sections shall
be on transparent cross section sheets for print reproductions. All sheets shall have a
title block and be of the size designated by the Engineer. On final approval of the
Contractor's cross sections, the Contractor shall submit the original transparencies and
3 prints of each such transparency.
D. In case of any variations from the approved Drawings, the Contractor shall submit the
original and 2 copies of the plotted cross sections and profiles and the notes and
computations of his survey. The Contractor shall take cross sections at maximum 25
m intervals along the centerline and at other locations if directed by the Engineer.
Upon mutual agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor, the Contractor may
submit cross sections intermediate to these locations. The Engineer will indicate, on
one copy, his approval of the proposed lines of the Works or his revisions thereto and
return such copy to the Contractor. The Contractor shall resubmit for approval any
cross sections the Engineer may have revised.
E. The Contractor may, as an alternate method of earthwork computation, request
approval to use an electronic computer. Such request shall include details of the
computer hardware, the earthwork software programs, the input and output, and a
complete summary of the methods and procedures to be used. The Contractor may
use an electronic computer for computations, only if approved, and continuance of
such approval is contingent upon satisfactory results being achieved. If results are not
as represented or are otherwise deemed unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall
recomputed the earthwork quantities by the cross section method.

3-1-8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES


3-1-8-1 GENERAL
A. LOCATIONS: The Engineer's approval is to be obtained for the intended locations
sitting of all spoil heaps, Temporary Works and services.
B. STANDARDS AND DETAILS: Temporary Works are to be constructed to
recognized standards and codes of practice so that they are fit for their purpose.
Drawings and details of proposed Temporary Works are to be provided by the
Contractor if requested by the Engineer.
C. TEMPORARY WORKS and services are to be maintained, altered and adapted and
as necessary and cleared away on completion or when no longer required. Work
disturbed is to be made good.

31
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

D. GENERAL: The Contractor shall provide all Temporary Works and services and
Contractor's Equipment and tools required for the efficient and safe execution of the
Works, including but not limited to:
- Temporary roads, hard standings, sleeper tracks and the like.
- Temporary fences, gates and barriers.
- Temporary offices, stores, mess rooms, latrines and compounds.
- Scaffold, ladders, hoists, cranes and the like.
- Temporary screens, chutes, coverings, roofs and rainwater pipes for protection
of the Works and personnel.
- Transport and vehicles on and off Site.
- Fixed and movable mechanical plant and equipment.
- Small tools.
- Temporary water and power supplies and site lighting.
- Temporary drainage.
3-1-8-2 TEMPORARY SITE FACILITIES
A. ROADS: Permanent roads, hard standings and footpaths on the Site may be used
provided they are adequately maintained and thoroughly cleaned and made good after
use and left in unimpaired condition.
B. DIVERSIONS: The Contractor shall in accordance with the specification of the
Ministry of Communication and with liaison with the Traffic Department:
Provide temporary detour roads, temporary bridges and culverts, and other facilities to
divert traffic through or around any part of the Works or for maintenance of traffic in
locations affected by his works that warrant such Temporary Works. Location,
standard, width, construction and maintenance of detour routes shall be in accordance
with Section 3.06 of the Specification, approved by the Engineer, ensuring at all times
that the routes, are signed, striped, maintained and furnished with all traffic control
devices as shown, directed and/or needed.
 Submit designs and detailed working Drawings of the proposed Temporary
Works for approval by the Engineer prior to commencement of the works. The
design live load for temporary bridges related to roads exposed to heavy
vehicles shall not be less than the design live load for permanent bridges, or as
directed by the Engineer.
 Where measurements are required for continuously regulating and supervising
traffic, provide temporary roads and bridges for one-way traffic with a
minimum width of 3.5m. In all other cases the minimum width shall be 7m.
 Phase the execution of temporary and Permanent Works to minimise the
disruption to traffic.
 Submit a phased programme of Temporary Works one month before
commencement of any part of the works.
C. TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS: The Contractor shall provide temporary diversions, detour
roads, temporary bridges, culverts and similar facilities, whenever it is necessary to
safely divert traffic through or around any part of the Works. As per concerned
authorities requirements for locations design widths, construction and maintenance of
diversion and detour routes, including the provision of signs, pavement markings,
lighting, traffic control and the like are to be submitted to and approved by the
Engineer prior to execution on Site.

32
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

E. FRENCH CROSSINGS are to be provided for free and safe passage of vehicles and
pedestrians over pipe and other trenches.
F. TEMPORARY SITE FENCE: The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure
temporary site fencing and gates where necessary or as directed by the Engineer.
Design of the fencing and gates, including location, construction details, etc. is to be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to fabrication and erection.
G. NAMEBOARD: The Contractor shall provide reflecting boards (150 x 150) cm at the
start and end point of the excavations. Those boards should include the project name,
project no., ministry name, Contractor name, and his local address and phone No. in
addition to the supervision Consultants. Boards’ specifications and locations should
be approved by the Client and the Engineer.
General name boards for the whole project should be fixed at the specified locations
by the Engineer and in each district of the project area. Those boards should include
the project name, Client name, Contractor name, Contact no’s, Consultant name and
phone no. for the supervision staff office. Boards will be of 4 separated slices each of
(240 x 240) cm with spaces of 20 cm between slices that are made of 3 mm thick
aluminum and provided with back grooves for fixing on the columns, so no holes
should appear at the face side of the board. Face slide should be covered with
reflective blue layer and text in reflective white color.
Boards shall be fixed on two columns of hot galvanized (16 or 18) cm I beams and the
clear space from the ground to the bottom of the slices shall be 2.0 m and the columns
should be provided with movable hinge according to the MOT specifications and fixed
to the ground by concrete blocks as per the site conditions. All these details should be
approved by the Engineer prior to installation of boards.
3-1-8-3 CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY BUILDINGS
Complete according to Project - Project Specifications. To be completed by the design
consultant and the water authority.
3-1-8-4 TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. WATER: The Contractor shall provide clean, fresh water for the Works and make
temporary arrangements for storing and distributing about the Site.
B. ELECTRICITY: The Contractor shall provide electric supply and all equipment for
lighting and power for the Works and make temporary arrangements for distributing
about the Site.
C. POWER: The Contractor shall provide electric power for the Works, including
supplies for commissioning engineering services and Plant, at the required voltages.
D. LIGHTING: The Contractor shall provide lighting for the Site and the Works for
safety and security of the Works and to facilitate proper execution of work and to
illuminate internal surfaces during finishing work and inspection. Spaces designed to
be artificially lit during daylight hours are to have temporary illumination similar to
that provided by the permanent installation.
E. PERMANENT ELECTRIC SUPPLY AND LIGHTING INSTALLATION may
be used for testing and commissioning and to illuminate the Works, subject to the
following conditions:
 The Employer does not guarantee that it will be available.
 The Contractor must take responsibility for the operation, maintenance and
supervision of the system, indemnify the Employer against all damage and pay

33
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

all costs and renew all used tubes and lamps.


F. TELEPHONES: The Contractor shall provide joint temporary telephone facilities for
his own and Subcontractors' use and for the use of those acting on behalf of the
Engineer and shall pay the cost of all calls except international calls made by those
acting on behalf of the Engineer.
3-1-8-5 DIVERSION OF PUBLIC UTILITY SERVICES
A. TEMPORARY DIVERSION OF EXISTING PUBLIC UTILITY SERVICES:
Where execution of the Works involves the temporary diversion of existing public
utility services, the Contractor shall perform such temporary diversion and shall
maintain the flow or service as directed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise stated, the
costs of any such diversions are deemed to be included in the Contract Price.
B. PERMANENT DIVERSION OF EXISTING PUBLIC UTILITY SERVICES: Where
the Works require the permanent diversion of existing public utility services, either as
shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, the diversion shall be carried out
by the Contractor and shall be paid for at the prices stated for such work in the Bill of
Quantities.

3-1-9 SAFETY PRECAUTION MEASURES


3-1-9-1 GENERAL
Contractor shall take all necessary measures for public safety for all project
components according to the requirements of municipalities and other concerned
authorities.

3-2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING


3-2-1 SCOPE
The Work Covered in this Division Comprises: Clearing of the site, and excavation
and backfilling for roads, structures and trenches and protection work related to
gabions, riprap, stone pitching and geotextiles.
3-2-2 SITE CLEARING
3-2-2-1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all vegetation, surface debris, stones and
rocks from areas where the Works are to be performed.
B. When shown on drawings or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove
and dispose of pavement layers including asphalt and granular layer to the surface of
the sub grade. Moreover the ground surface under all structures shall be cleared of all
existing concrete foundations (if any) and stumps.
C. Trees shall be removed carefully, stored and / or relocated as specified or as instructed
by the concerned Authorities and the Engineer.
3-2-2-2 REMOVAL OF REALIGNMENT OF OBSTRUCTION AND UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall remove wholly or in part and dispose of all obstructions,
buildings, fences, abandoned pipelines and others, as indicated on drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Where indicated on the Drawings, utilities are to be realigned or salvaged as directed
by the Engineer.

34
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

3-2-3 EXCAVATION
3-2-3-1 GENERAL
A. Earth: naturally occurring, man made or placed material that can be removed manually
or by mechanical shovel, bulldozer or other mechanical equipment.
B. Rock/Hard Materials: naturally occurring, man made or placed material of more than
one cubic meter that cannot be destroyed or removed by methods used for removal of
earth described in Clause A but requires the use of pneumatic tools, impact breakers
or, if allowed, explosives for its removal.
C. Materials and conditions: the Contractor shall assess the nature of the work and the
materials to be excavated, and shall take sole responsibility for his assessment of
materials and conditions.
D. Ground-water level is to be established at the time the various excavations are carried
out.
3-2-3-2 TOP SOIL
A. Topsoil: before beginning general excavations or filling, the Contractor shall excavate
topsoil from required areas and keep separate from excavated subsoil.
B. The Contractor shall stockpile excavated topsoil required to carry out subsequent top-
soiling operations in temporary spoil heaps on the Site as instructed.
C. Surplus Topsoil: The Contractor shall remove from the Site to a tip provided by the
Contractor
3-2-3-3 EXCAVATING
A. General
A.1 All excavation shall be performed to the line, grades, cross section and sizes shown on
the drawings, or/and directed by the Engineer.
A.2 Methods: The Contractor shall submit with the Tender details of proposed methods of
working which may cause nuisance, damage or danger to people and/or property.
A.3 Materials arising from excavations are to remain the property of the Employer unless
instructed to be removed from the Site as per the Engineer or the authorities
instructions.
B. Excavations for Adjacent Utilities
B.1 Underground services must be set out so that their excavations do not encroach below
a line drawn at an angle from the horizontal from the nearest lower edge of building
foundations. The angle shall be 45 degrees for dry stable soil or 30 degrees for wet
clays or soils below water table. If this condition cannot be met obtain instructions
before proceeding.
B.2 Where an excavation encroaches below a line drawn at an angle from the horizontal of
45 degrees for dry stable soil or 30 degrees for wet clays or soils below water table
from the nearest formation level of another higher excavation then all work within the
lower excavation and backfilling thereto must be completed before the higher
excavation is made.
C. Excavated formations are to be inspected and approved before new work is laid on
them. The Contractor shall give 24 hours written notice of when excavations will be
ready for inspection. If, after inspection, surfaces become unsuitable due to water,
frost or other causes, excavate further and backfill with approved material all at the
Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall place concrete or other fill as soon as
possible after inspection.

35
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

D. The bottom 200 mm thickness of excavation shall be removed by hand just prior to
placing concrete blinding or pipe laying.
E. The Contractor shall level or grade and compact bottoms of excavations to Engineer's
approval.
F. Headings: The Contractor shall drive accurately to required line and gradient and
provide adequate support. Construct in approved lengths to size required to contain
permanent work. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer before
commencing activities.
G. Support
G.1 Sides of Excavations: Responsibility for upholding sides of excavations rests with the
Contractor.
G.2 Earthwork Support: The Contractor shall use as necessary to support sides of
excavations and remove on completion unless otherwise instructed. In the event of
any collapse occurring while excavations are open this will be the Contractor’s full
responsibility and he should re-excavate and reinstate such excavations and other
work affected at the Contractor's expense and responsibility.
G.3 Steel Sheet Piling: The Contractor shall use as necessary to support sides of
excavations and remove on completion unless otherwise instructed.
G.4 Special Support: The Contractor shall use as necessary to uphold excavations against
sides of adjoining buildings, public footpaths, roads and the like and remove on
completion unless otherwise instructed.
G.5 Unstable Ground: The Contractor shall inform the Engineer without delay if any
newly excavated face will not remain unsupported sufficiently long to allow the
necessary earthwork support to be inserted. If the instability is likely to affect
adjacent structures or roadways take appropriate emergency action. Responsibility for
preventing instability rests with the Contractor.
H. Waterways: Temporary diversion as necessary of ditches, field drains and other
waterways encountered during the excavations is to include reinstatement on
completion. If reinstatement is not possible the Contractor shall obtain instructions.
I. Existing watercourses which have been diverted and are to be filled must be cleared of
all vegetable growth and soft deposits before filling.
J. Existing Foundations
J.1 Where old foundations, beds, drains etc. are encountered the Contractor shall obtain
instructions before proceeding.
J.2 Breaking out old foundations, beds, drains etc. is to include sealing off drain ends,
removing contaminated earth and disinfecting as necessary and according to the
Engineer instructions.
K. Backfilling of excavations shall be as specified in other Sections of these
specifications.
L. Unauthorized Excavations: The Contractor shall backfill and compact as instructed at
no expense to the Employer.
M. Water: All excavations shall be kept free from water arising from any source at all
times. The discharge of any water from the excavations must not effect other parts of
the works or adjoining areas.
N. Pumping: The Contractor shall not disturb material in and around excavations by
pumping operations.

36
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

O. Sumps: The Contractor shall obtain approval of location of any sumps and fill with
approved material when no longer required.
P. Permanent drainage system is not to be used for disposal of water from excavations
without approval.
Q. The Contractor shall keep all excavations adequately drained at all times. Damage to
any part of the work due to poor drainage facilities shall be repaired at the Contractor's
expense.
R. All excavated slopes shall be cut to the slopes shown on the Drawings.
3-2-3-4 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A. No excavated material shall be wasted without written permission from the Engineer.
Suitable material from excavation shall be used for embankment construction or
backfill, as directed by the Engineer.
B. Surplus Subsoil: The Contractor shall remove from the Site surplus excavated
materials not specified as to be spread and leveled or stockpiled to a tip provided by
the Contractor.
C. Tip: The Contractor shall use only public dumpsites assigned by the concerned
authorities for disposal of surplus excavated material removed from the Site and pay
all tip fees.
3-2-3-5 ROCK EXCAVATION
A. All blasting shall be carried out in such a manner as will produce the least possible
disturbance of the material left in place.
B. All the necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the blasting shall not be
dangerous to people or property.
C. Where necessary or directed, the Contractor shall provide heavy mesh blasting mats
for protection of persons, properties, and the Works. If, in the opinion of the
Authorities and the Engineer, blasting would be dangerous to persons or adjacent
structures, or is being carried out in an unsafe or unacceptable manner, the Engineer
may prohibit blasting and order the rock to be excavated by other means.
D. If the flow of traffic is to be interrupted during blasting operations, the Contractor
shall secure approval of his schedule for such interruptions and his proposed methods
for safeguarding the public and property.
E. All drilling and blasting shall be done in such a manner as will most nearly complete
the excavation to the required grade lines, and produce the least practicable
disturbance of the material to be left in place. Blasting by means of drill holes,
tunnels, or any other methods shall be entirely at the Contractor's risk.
F. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, rock cuts higher than 3 m shall be formed
using pre-splitting. Prior to starting the pres-splitting operation the Contractor shall
submit a layout plan showing the location of drill-holes, type of explosive to be used
and sequence of firing. This plan does not absolve the Contractor of his
responsibilities for the safety of people and structures, or for producing a satisfactory
stable rock face. No extra cost is charged by the Contractor for using pre-splitting.
G. All over breaks, overhangs loose blocks or unstable parts of the cut face, and benches
shall be cleared and cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
H. Backfilling of over breakage shall be carried out as directed, using approved soil or
crushed materials or other special aggregate or cyclopean concrete, as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Undrained pockets shall not be left in the

37
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

surface of the rock.

3-2-3-6 ROAD EXCAVATION (FOR PREPARATION OF SERVICE ROADS


ALONG PIPELINES)
A. Scope
A.1 These Works shall consist of excavating material in cut sections of the road, including
water courses, ditches and wadi relocations (but excluding borrow pits and structural
excavation) all as and where shown on the Drawings, and hauling the excavated
material either to locations for road embankments or to stockpiles or to waste.
A.2 These Works shall also include any necessary excavations outside the ROW ordered
by the Engineer to safeguard and protect the Works. These may include diversion of
existing water courses, channels; excavation of materials obstructing or impairing the
flow along stream channels; and excavation of unstable materials which may slide or
encroach into ditches or onto the ROW. Disposal of all such excavated materials shall
be as instructed by the Engineer.
B. Classification of Road Excavation
B.1 Any information concerning properties of the soil which may be shown on the plans,
in the Bill of Quantities, in supplementary reports, or as a result of discussion with the
Engineer or others shall be considered as gratis and shall not be a basis for the
Contractor's determination of his bid prices.
C. Utilization of Excavated Materials
C.1 All materials removed from the excavation shall be used in the formation of the
embankment, sub grade, shoulder, and at such other places as directed, unless it is
declared unsuitable and ordered to be wasted by the Engineer.
C.2 Unsuitable material shall include:
 Unstable materials incapable of being compacted to the specified density using
ordinary compaction methods at optimum moisture content for the equipment
being used for compaction.
 Material too wet to be compacted and circumstance prevents suitable in-place
drying prior to incorporation into the work.
 Materials which are otherwise unsuitable for use in or under the embankment.
C.3 No excavation material shall be wasted without written permission from the Engineer.
C.4 Excavated rock which is not immediately suitable for incorporation in the works can
either be broken down to acceptable sizes or wasted at Contractor's expense.
D. Drainage of Excavation Areas
D.1 The Contractor shall schedule road excavation and embankment and drainage Works
so that they complement each other. If the Contractor's earthwork progress exceeds
the progress of the drainage construction to the point where the road becomes a dam to
cross drainage, the Engineer may order the Contractor to open adequate waterways
through the highway at the locations where drainage structures are to be installed. Any
damage to the highway caused by water passing through these openings shall be
repaired at the Contractor's expense.
D.2 During construction, surfaces in excavation areas shall be adequately drained at all
times. Side ditches or gutters emptying from cut to embankment shall be so
constructed as to avoid damage to embankments by erosion.
D.3 Damage to the Works attributable to saturation or erosion through failure to provide

38
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

adequate drainage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense.


D.4 Whenever groundwater is encountered which may adversely affect construction, the
Contractor shall advise the Engineer who will evaluate the situation and order
necessary remedial measures to drain or extract water.
E. Slopes, Sub grade and Ditches
E.1 All excavated slopes, sub grade and ditches shall be finished true to lines, grades and
cross sections as shown on the Drawings.
E.2 Slopes, except in massive rock or other material which require special treatment, shall
be trimmed to slopes not steeper than the specified slope angles and rounded at top
and bottom to a smooth profile to blend in with the adjacent terrain. Material shall not
be loosened beyond the specified slope lines. High cut areas shall continuously be
monitored by an engineering geologist or a geotechnical Engineer.
E.3 In cuts where earth overlays a rock formation, slopes shall be benched in an approved
manner.
E.4 Ditches of all types shall be excavated and trimmed neatly in conformity with the
specified grades and cross sections. All projecting rock, stumps, roots or similar shall
be removed. Ditches include side ditches, furrow ditches, irrigation ditches, wadi
relocations, etc.
E.5 The Engineer will periodically check all or any part of the Works, to determine
conformance to the correct lines, grades and elevations. Tolerances on finished
subgrade elevations and on elevations of the surface at the underside of the subgrade
layer, shall be as specified in Section 2.05 - "Subgrade Construction".
F. Excavation of Unsuitable Material
F.1 Where excavation to finished grades and cross sections exposes unsuitable material in
the subgrade, slopes or ditch inverts, etc the Engineer may require the Contractor to
remove the unsuitable material and backfill the excavated areas using approved
material. The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a way that necessary
cross section measurements are taken before such backfill is placed.
F.2 Unsuitable material shall be disposed of as directed. Wasted unsuitable material shall
not be deposited on any cropland.
F.3 When the Contractor is directed to excavate unsuitable material below the surface of
the original ground in fill areas, other than that required for clearing and grubbing, the
depth to which unsuitable material shall be removed will be determined by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall schedule the excavation so that cross sections are
taken before and after material has been removed.
F.4 Unsuitable materials outside the ROW or ditch slopes which, in the opinion of the
Engineer, are potentially unstable and liable to slide or encroach into the ROW or into
the ditches, shall be excavated and disposed of as specified for unsuitable material,
unless it is approved for use as embankment fill.
F.5 Unsuitable and surplus materials disposed of elsewhere than within the ROW shall be
spread, leveled and shaped as directed so as to present a neat and tidy appearance. No
materials shall be disposed of in such a way as to adversely affect natural drainage
courses or to cause damage to the highway or adjacent public or private property
F.6 If approved by concerned authorities land can be used for disposal to the maximum
extent practicable. If private land is used for disposal, the Contractor shall secure the
consent of the landowner or tenant and, if necessary, and at his expense, pay for the
use of such land. The use of cropland for disposal purposes will not be permitted.

39
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

3-2-3-7 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES


A. Scope
A.1 These Works shall consist of all excavation in any material for structures associated
with networks such as water tanks, pump houses, culverts, utility ducts and water
underdrains; for retaining walls of all types; and for other major and minor structures;
and including all necessary clearing and grubbing; bailing; drainage; pumping;
sheeting; temporary shoring and cribbing; construction of temporary cofferdams or
cribs; and disposal of all excavated material and backfilling with suitable approved
material; all as and where shown on the Drawings.
A.2 These Works shall also include the removal of those portions of existing structures
below ground which would in any way obstruct or interfere with construction of new
structures.
A.3 The Contractor will be deemed to be fully aware, at the time of tendering, as to the
type and nature of soils and rock that will be encountered in structural excavations.
B. Excavation
B.1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a sufficient time in advance of the beginning
of any excavation for structures so that the Engineer may, where necessary, survey
and record the cross sectional elevations and measurements of the existing ground and
existing structures affected by the proposed structure. Any materials removed or
excavated before these measurements have been taken and approved by the Engineer
will not be paid for.
B.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety at all times of all foundation
and trench excavations whether supported or otherwise. Approval of the Contractor's
support system or omission of a support system for any excavations shall not absolve
the Contractor from his sole responsibility in this regard.
B.3 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions, including shoring or otherwise, to
protect employees in the excavation and on the ground above. The Engineer will not
enter excavated areas to approve the foundation and further Works until he deems the
areas to be safe.
B.4 In areas where the excavation is adjacent to public roads and walkways, the Contractor
shall erect all necessary barricades, barriers, enclosed walkways, and warning signs
necessary to restrict the exposure of the public to the excavation.
B.5 The sides of all foundation pits and trenches shallower than 1.5m shall be vertical and
adequately supported at all times unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Sides more
than 1.5 m in depth shall be sloped at a stable slope or supported in an approved
manner unless the material through which the pit or trench is cut is deemed to be
sufficiently self supporting and not requiring support.
B.6 Pits and trenches shall be kept free from water until footing concrete has been placed
or pipes have been installed. The Contractor shall minimize, to the maximum extent
practicable, the length of time excavated areas are open. The Contractor will be held
responsible for damage due to weather, equipment, and other causes during periods
when the excavations are left open.
B.7 The Contractor shall schedule the Works so that no excavation is left in an exposed
condition for a period greater than 20 days unless otherwise approved.
B.8 In areas where the excavation is adjacent to public highways, roads and walkways,
excavation shall be scheduled such as not to be left in an exposed condition for more
than 7 days unless otherwise approved.

40
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B.9 For excavation in material sensitive to moisture (stiff clays, marls, etc.) the excavation
shall be cleaned and concrete blinding layer cast immediately on completion of the
excavation.
B.10 The Contractor must notify the Engineer of any sign of failure or cracks within or
around the excavation immediately when such signs are noticed.
C. Temporary Support System
C.1 When a temporary support system is required to protect adjacent property or to protect
the public during construction, the Contractor's design for such support system shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to commencing its construction.
C.2 All temporary support systems shall be designed with adequate factors of safety to
serve with minimal maintenance, for the duration of its intended use, and shall include
adequate safety provisions to protect the public from construction activities.
C.3 Notwithstanding any approval of temporary support systems, the Contractor shall be
solely responsible for the adequacy of their design, construction, maintenance and all
necessary safety precautions associated therewith.
D. Excavation for Major Structures
D.1 The foundations for buildings, water tanks, pump houses and other major structures,
shall be excavated in accordance with the dimensions as shown on the Drawings and
shall be of sufficient size to permit the placing of the full width and lengths of the
footings.
D.2 The excavation shall be carried to the elevations shown on the Drawings or as
established by the Engineer. Borings and soil tests, made during design and actual
investigation of the completed foundation excavation shall be utilized by the Engineer
to determine final depth. No concrete shall be placed prior to approval of the
excavation pit.
D.3 Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, the bottom of all excavations shall be
covered with a 75 mm minimum depth of lean (blinding) concrete Class 110/25 to
serve as a working platform.
D.4 Foundation pits or trenches shall be of sufficient size and provide minimum sufficient
working space to permit construction of structures or structure footings of the full
width and length shown on the Drawings.
D.5 Where footings are to be constructed using formwork, the excavations shall generally
not extend more than 500 mm beyond the maximum dimension on each side of the
proposed footing unless additional working space is clearly required and approved, by
the Engineer. Any unauthorised over width of excavation beyond the lateral limits
shown on the drawings or approved by the Engineer shall be backfilled with selected
fill or lean concrete as directed by the Engineer.
D.6 Where footings are to be located, in or adjacent to firm, original ground and where
formwork is not required or ordered, any unauthorized over depth excavation below
the approved elevation of base of footing shall be backfilled with blinding concrete.
D.7 Where excavation to rock foundation is required, the excavation shall proceed in such
a manner as to allow the solid rock to be exposed and prepared in horizontal beds or
properly serrated for receiving the concrete. All loose and disintegrated rock and thin
strata shall be removed.
D.8 All blasting necessary for foundation placement shall be performed prior to placing
any concrete. Blasting will not be permitted in the vicinity of concrete which has not
cured for at least 14 days. Blasting shall not affect concrete properties and integrity in
any way.

41
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

D.9 When unstable material or other unsuitable material is encountered below foundation
elevation like swelling soil or others, the Contractor shall excavate such material and
replace it with suitable backfill material or concrete as directed by the Engineer.
D.10 If temporary works are required for maintaining the excavation dry, the Contractor
shall be responsible for the design and execution of the works. The proposed design
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval; however, such approval does not
relieve the Contractor for his sole responsibility in this regard.
3-2-3-8 EXCAVATION FOR PIPE TRENCHES
A. Before excavating trenches for pipes in any road, the contractor shall acquire the
necessary permission from the Engineer and concerned authorities.
B. The Contractor shall not starting excavation works in any section of
the work until supply of pipes and fittings and accessories needed for the work
concerning this section.
C. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling (Section 3-2-4) shall be piled at
sufficient distance from the sides of the trench as to avoid overloading and prevent
cave in. All excavated material not required, or unsuitable for backfilling shall be
removed and carted away to an approved dumping area.
D. Trenches shall be excavated to such depths as will permit the pipes to be laid at
elevations, slopes or depths of cover indicated on the drawings, and at uniform slopes
between indicated elevations.
E. Where excavation depth exceeds the level indicated on the drawings and is not
authorized in writing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall bear the cost of the excess
excavation, backfill or concrete level make up of any type as instructed by the
Engineer.
F. Trenches shall be excavated with vertical sides between the elevation of the bottom of
the trench and an elevation 300 mm above the top of the pipe.
G. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, trench widths will be as shown in the
following table (2-1):
Table (2-1) Trench Widths for Pipes of Different Diameters
Pipe diameter (mm) Trench Width (mm)
Minimum Maximum
< 150 650 950
200 700 1000
250 750 1050
300 850 1150
350 900 1200
400 950 1250
450 1050 1350
500 1100 1400
600 1250 1550
700 1350 1650

42
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Pipe diameter (mm) Trench Width (mm)


Minimum Maximum
800 1500 1800
900 1600 1900
1000 1750 2050
1100 1900 2200
1200 2000 2300
1300 2150 2450
1400 2250 2550
1500 2400 2700
1600 2550 2850
1700 2650 2950
1800 2800 3100
1900 2900 3200
2000 3050 3350
2100 3200 3500
2200 3300 3600
2300 3450 3750
2400 3550 3850
The lowest trench width will be used for the calculation of quantities and payment for
all types of trenches and excavation in rocks. The contractor should have included in
his prices any extra expenses that will be needed for extra excavation beyond the
trench width; this is applied also for the pavement and road surface finishing works.
H. Where the above specified trench maximum widths are exceeded; the Contractor shall
bear the cost of increased pipe strength or additional pipe protection if the Engineer
calls for such measures due to excavations being taken wider than specified.
I. Excavation with battered sides shall not intrude into private property and shall respect
the statutory regulations relevant to the R.O.W. and property limits.
J. When the pipe, culvert or duct are to be laid in embankments or other fill areas, the
embankment or fill area shall first be filled and compacted as specified to the proposed
finished grade or to a height of at least 300 mm above the crown of pipe whichever is
lower. The trench shall then be excavated as in undisturbed material.
K. When pipes, culverts or ducts are to be laid under existing pavements, trenches shall
be excavated carefully and to minimum widths. Methods that will give straight and
vertical face shall be used. The pavement shall be kept at its original level and
condition.
L. In combined trenches where one pipe is at a lower level than an adjacent pipe the
following shall be applied:
 The whole trench shall have a depth related to the lower pipe and the thickness
of the bedding shall be increased to the upper pipe as necessary.

43
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

 The lower pipe shall be backfilled with thoroughly compacted granular


material up to a level of 300mm above the higher pipe.
M. Excavation for the forming of the trench for beds shall be carried out immediately
before laying beds or pipes. Unstable material, rock projections, boulders and hard
spots shall be removed and replaced with approved well consolidated filling material,
that will be compacted as instructed. Local soft spots shall be hardened by tamping in
bedding material.
N. The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and
support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Bell holes shall be
excavated to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing.
Any material or block that may cause point bearing shall be removed.
O. The Contractor shall report to the Engineer any unsuitable or weak ground material
that may found below the indicated excavation levels before executing any trimming
of the excavation, pipe laying, concreting, or other work. Where, in the judgment of
the Engineer the bottom of the trench is found unsuitable, such material shall be
removed to the width and depth ordered by the Engineer. The trench shall then be
made up by backfilling with approved material as specified herein after.
P. Where rock excavation is encountered, the trench shall be excavated to min. 200 mm
below pipe invert and replaced with granular material matching the specification in
Item (3-2-4-5) or concrete class 110/25, as directed by the Engineer and in the case
of normal soil the bedding shall be at least of 150 mm thickness.
Q. Headings, when required, shall be accurately driven to required line and gradient and
adequate support shall be provided. Construction shall be carried out in approved
lengths and to size required to contain permanent work. Approval shall be obtained
before starting pipe laying or other work.
R. Generally, trench excavation, pipe laying, and trench backfilling for any particular
project section shall be completed in twenty (20) days. At any one time, the maximum
length of open trenches in the project shall not exceed 300 meters.
S. The Contractor should give special care while excavating in paved areas, so the
excavation width not to exceed the specified width. The Contractor should use the
suitable mechanical machines to cut the pavement in straight lines and the edges
should be vertical. In addition, the Contractor should always use vehicles with
suitable tires (Air tire) that will not damage the road surface pavement.
3-2-3-9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THRUST BORING
This section covers pipes and fittings installation through Thrust boring. The relevant
sections mentioned in the general specifications for the implementation of the
drainage networks for the Water directorate general in Riyadh shall be considered
applicable by the present agreement unless otherwise stated therein. Furthermore it is
a must to comply with the entire specifications and conditions related to the Ministry
of Transport and Saudi Railway Organization regarding the implementation of such
works.
A. The general drilling of the ground pits and tunnels
 The implementation of ground pits and the installation of pipelines should be
carried out by jacking as approved by the engineer.
 The perforations of the ground pits should be of practical dimensions enabling to
proceed in the structural works properly. The drilling works should be performed
with extreme care preventing earth settlement and sliding and following the design

44
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

alignment and levels for the external dimensions of pits not to be anywhere
smaller than the dimensions mentioned in the plans or determined by the engineer.
The Contractor should use specialized manpower in the drilling works of pits.
 The Contractor should supply and fix all the other temporary supports and other
necessary structures to ensure the safety of works and adjacent structures outside
the permanent work place to the engineer’s approval.
 The contractor must provide communication means between the pits and the and
the work areas that should not be of same quality like the telephone
communication and that, to the engineer’s approval.
 The contractor should supply and operate and maintain an appropriate lighting and
ventilation network for each pit and the commencement of the drill obtaining the
engineer’s approval. The electricity power supply should be adequate.
 All equipment shall be installed and maintained inside and around pits according
to the relevant work regulations and as per the suitable practical application
principles to the engineer’s satisfaction.
 The pits should have separate openings equipped with stairs in addition to other
required openings during the structural works. Each pit should be surrounded by
closed fence of height not less than 1.80 meter equipped with security red lights
when working in the traffic areas.
 When work is suspended for any reason, the sides of pits should be covered and
supported by wooden boards and covered with light mortar for safety reasons,
unless the engineer decides to take other measures.
The contractor should take these temporary works into account while preparing his
prices. All the temporary supports and structure for pits should be removed when
no more needed unless otherwise directed by the engineer.
 Before starting to request any trench excavation equipment or starting any work
the contractor should present detailed proposals for making access openings or the
work openings to the engineer.
 The earth reinforcement must be of sheet steel supports or of similar approved
fixed metal ring supports. The contractor may use precast concrete pieces for the
ground reinforcement above the permanent work place, if the concrete pieces are
used for support; they should be covered as per the specifications and discarded or
broken after the work completion.
B. Checking alignment and levels
 Checking and adjustment of the alignment and levels should be done using laser.
The contractor should prepare and present his proposals for checking and
adjustment of the alignment and levels to the engineer’s representative for
approval in an earlier phase in the Contract.
 When permanent works are done outside the overstepping boundaries allowed by
the present specifications, the contractor should remedy this situation according to
the engineer’s directives.
C. Works for preventing water leakage
 All works should not have water leakage upon the completion of works and should
remain free of water leakage until the expiry of the maintenance period.
 The contractor should immediately repair the defects at the engineer’s satisfaction.

45
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

D. Ground treatment
 If the contractor considers that special a ground treatment is required and
necessary for preventing settling and sliding during the construction he must
request the authorization from the engineer in this concern. When the contractor is
given the authorization, he must carry out works as mentioned in the
specifications. Such authorization (or the refusal the authorization) does not
exempt the contractor from assuming the responsibility of securing works safety.
 The treatment should be implemented in sequences suitable to work requirements
and the contractor should carry out testing according to the engineer’s directives to
check their efficiency during and after the treatment works.
 The contractor should keep meticulous and detailed register for all the ground
treatment methods to the engineer’s satisfaction. He must submit everyday copy of
such register to the engineer when the ground treatment is carried out. In the cases
where the engineer considers that such technique is necessary and essential for the
appropriate implementation of works he will give the necessary instructions to the
contractor. The payment for the ground treatment should be included in the prices
of the pipeline by thrust boring. The contractor should assume the responsibility of
the damages occurring from the ground treatment operations.
E. Noise restriction means and the electrical machinery.
 In order to minimize as much as possible the disturbance emanating from the
equipment noise during the night, the contractor should operate the machinery
with the electrical power unless otherwise authorized by the engineer.
 The operations above ground level during night work should be restricted to the
minimum practicable work and the contractor should take all the precautionary
measures for preventing unnecessary noise.
F. Pipe Jacking
 Before starting works, the contractor should submit to the engineer full details on
his suggested methods for obtaining the engineer’s approval, such details should
include the following information:
- Interjacking locations and the reinforcement of the starting points of
excavation.
- Dimensions of the starting points of the tunnel excavation and the supporting
methods of the excavations.
- Dimensions and details of the retaining wall
- All the sizes of the operating equipment
- Locations of the drainage gutter and the methods of preserving works free of
water
 The pipes jacking starts from the reinforced starting point of excavation, which
should be dug in with suitable size to accommodate the reinforcement wall, the
jacking equipment and the appropriate work place.
 Excavation should be carried out inside the protection installations, which should
be kept in all times close to the work level and must be adjusted for monitoring the
alignment and the level.
 Reinforcement should be used for the loose non-steady open excavation when pipe
jacking works are suspended.

46
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

 The pipe jacking is done through hydraulic pressure by using appropriate jacket
designed for the higher pressure and using ring supports for distributing the pipe
jacking forces. The pipe jacking system should allow testing from both the surface
location and the surface of excavation starting point.
 The pipe jacking stations located at the center of the trajectory should properly
serve the jacked pipes joints and the relevant connections. Connections should be
hermetically closed and anti-leakage when in service.
 The contractor should take all the necessary steps for securing the safety of pipes
and the tunnel protective coating during jacking of pipes. If damages occur due to
the contractor works, Contractor should carry out the necessary repair to the
engineer’s satisfaction and he should withdraw the damaged pipes and export it
out of site if instructed by the Engineer, without any extra cost.
G. Thrust Boring under the railways
 The contractor shall assume responsibility of securing the review of the adequate
procedures and the compliance with the specifications of Ministry of Transport
regarding the pipes crossing under the railways.
 The attention of the contractor should be drawn particularly to the requirements of
the Railway Saudi Arab Establishment. But all crossings should be placed
according to the fifth and tenth sections of the present guidelines of the Railway
Engineering Consultant Association, a copy of which is enclosed for the proper
use of the supervisor and/or engineer.
3-2-4 BACKFILLING WORKS
3-2-4-1 SCOPE OF WORKS
A. This section covers general soil filling material and source, backfilling for structures,
embankment construction, backfilling for pipe trenches and all particular requirements
related to these works.
3-2-4-2 FILLING MATERIAL AND BORROW MATERIAL
A. Filling material shall be approved and capable of being compacted as specified.
B. Filling materials for foundations and road filling shall pass a No. 3U.S. standard sieve
and the material passing a No. 4 U.S. standard sieve is to have a maximum plasticity
index of 6%. No piece is to have its largest dimension greater than one-third the
thickness of a compacted layer.
C. Sampling: The Contractor shall submit 50 kg representative samples to an approved
laboratory for tests as follows and submit results for approval:
 For Soils with Less than 50% Fines: Sieve analysis and compaction.
 For Soils with More than 50% Fines: Sieve analysis, Atteberg Limits and
Compaction.
D. Approval: Sources and types of materials and moisture contents at which they may be
placed and compacted are to be those approved after receipt of laboratory test results.
E. If suitable filling or backfill material is not available from material excavated on the
project site, the Contractor shall be responsible for locating suitable borrow and
arranging for the excavation of suitable material with the land owner.
F. Borrow pits are to be excavated in a uniform manner, neatly trimmed and graded and
left in an approved condition.
G. The borrow material shall fulfill the requirements specified for the intended use. No

47
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

borrow material shall be brought to the site unless it has been approved by the
Engineer.
H. Testing Fill from Borrow Pits: The Contractor shall sample and test in accordance
with ASTM D1557 to determine the optimum amount of water to be used with fill
material to obtain maximum dry density. Tests are to be conducted for every borrow
pit and for every type of fill material encountered.
I. The Engineer will periodically require testing of borrow materials to verify that no
change in quality has occurred since the original approval.
J. Field density tests on compacted soils are to be made at an average of one test per 100
m² of area. Minimum density required on soils when made in accordance with ASTM
D2167 'Rubber Balloon Method', ASTM D1556 'Sand-Cone Method' or ASTM
D2922 "Nuclear Method" is to be:
 For Backfill Under Roads, Parking Areas and Paved Areas up to 500 mm: 95%
of maximum dry density
 For Backfill Deeper than 500 mm Under Same Areas as last Described: 95%
of maximum dry density
 Elsewhere Such as Landscaped Areas: 90% of maximum dry density.
K. Selected Fill: Excavated material conforming to the specification for Filling material
and Borrow material, Clause B above.
3-2-4-3 BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES
A. General Requirements
A.1 The Contractor shall obtain approval for his proposed method and rate of placing of
backfill, before backfilling commences.
A.2 Excavated material or material from other sources for use as backfilling shall conform
to the below requirements:
- The supplied material shall not contain any organic or harmful material e.g: tree,
leaves, roots, and residues.
- The supplied material shall conform to classification types: A-1-a, A-1-b, A-2-4,
according to MRDTM 210 (Directorate of Material and Research at the MOC).
- The California Bearing Ratio shall not be less than 25% when tested according to
MRDTM 213.
- The maximum dry density shall not be less than 95% when tested according to
Directorate of Material and Research at the MOC.
- The material shall be well graded passing sieve no. 3 (75 mm sieve) and shall
contain fine material for proper compaction.
A.3 Backfill materials shall be uniformly graded granular material, capable of being
compacted to the specified compaction level, and having adequate permeability to
permit free drainage through it. Backfill material shall also conform to the following:
 Minimum D10 value 1 mm
 Maximum Plasticity Index 10 %
 Requirement for bridges, culverts etc. specified in subsequent sections.
A.4 Backfill material shall not be placed against any structure until approval is given.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Structures shall be backfilled to the same
requirements as specified for the adjacent embankment.
A.5 Backfill shall be placed in level layers for the full width of the excavated area until the

48
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

elevation of the original ground or surrounding embankment is reached. Backfill next


to walls, between columns or in other confined areas, shall be compacted by approved
hand or portable equipment.
A.6 Each successive layer of backfill shall contain only sufficient material to ensure proper
compaction and in no case shall any layer be greater than 300 mm thickness (before
compaction). The moisture content of the backfill material shall be uniform and
within the moisture range designated.
A.7 Water shall be drained from the areas to be backfilled wherever practicable. In cases
where, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practicable to drain the areas to be
backfilled, the initial backfill material shall consist of crushed, open graded material
conforming to the following gradation:

ASTM Sieve Percentage Passing


Size

3/8" 100
No. 4 < 85
No. 30 < 45
No. 200 <5

Such material may be deposited below the standing water level without compaction. Above
the water level normal laying and compaction will be used.
A.8 Additional water to be added during placement of backfill material to achieve required
compaction shall be fresh water or brackish water approved by the Engineer.
A.9 Minimum tests required during backfilling operations to verify material are:
 One Proctor test for each structure (or for each 100 m2).
 One Gradation of Materials when materials changed.
 One Plasticity Index and field density for 50% of the layers and for each
footing and abutment (or for each 500 m2) as per instruction of the Engineer.
B. Workmanship
B.1 Unsuitable Materials: The Contractor shall remove from the Site imported filling
materials deemed unsuitable by the Engineer.
B.2 Surplus: The Contractor shall remove surplus imported filling materials from the Site.
B.3 The Contractor shall place filling using approved methods to required dimensions,
levels, lines and profiles and to permit water to drain freely.
B.4 Earthmoving Equipment: The Contractor shall do not use for compaction except
where approved.
B.5 Heavy Steel or Pneumatic Rollers: Special precautions shall be taken to safeguard
existing structures when steel or pneumatic rollers are used. These shall not be used
when compacting backfill to pipe trenches.
B.6 Compaction Equipment: Backfilling shall be compacted by approved compaction
equipment suited to the type of material. Compaction around foundation walls,
culverts and small restricted areas shall be carried out by mechanical vibratory plates,

49
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

tampers or hydraulic compactors.


B.7 Moisture Content: Each layer of filling shall be moistened or dried to reach the correct
moisture content for the required dry density. The Contractor shall spread and
compact each layer to at least 95% of maximum dry density, unless otherwise
specified, all as determined by ASTM D1557. Each compacted layer shall be tested
and approved prior to placing subsequent layers.
C. Placing and Compacting Fill
C.1 Structures shall not be subject to the pressures of backfilling or to live loads until the
28-day strength of the concrete has been reached, unless a shorter period is approved
in special circumstances where the load is sufficiently small as not to constitute a risk
of any damage to the structure in the opinion of the Engineer. If approved this period
may be extended if subnormal curing conditions exist.
C.2 Surfaces to receive filling shall be cleared and all vegetation removed off Site before
filling is placed. Soil surfaces are to be scarified and re-compacted to at least 95% of
maximum dry density as determined by ASTM 1557. Compaction shall be to a depth
of at least 200 mm below ground surface. Hard or smooth surfaces shall be roughened
before filling is placed. Existing road surfaces and the like shall be broken up and
removed or used as part of fill.
C.3 Soil filling generally shall be selected fill spread and leveled in 300 mm maximum
layers each well consolidated with a suitable mechanical rammer.
C.4 The Contractor shall deposit soil filling in a manner not to endanger the partly finished
structure or sub-structure either by direct pressure or indirectly by overloading banks
contiguous to the operation or in any other manner.
C.5 Minor up filling and local adjustment of levels shall be selected fill spread and leveled
in 150 mm maximum layers each well consolidated by suitable mechanical means.
C.6 Benching: Where difference in level between adjacent areas of filling exceeds 600 mm
the Contractor shall cut into edge of higher filling to form benches having a minimum
width of 600 mm and a height equivalent to the depth of a layer of compacted filling.
C.7 Benching: The Contractor shall spread and compact new filling to ensure maximum
continuity with previous filling.
C.8 Protection of formation:
 Construction traffic shall not be allowed on completed filling until the level
has been raised not less than 150 mm above formation level by properly
compacted temporary protective filling
 Temporary protective filling shall be removed from the Site before beginning
permanent construction
 Stockpiling materials on newly filled areas shall not be done without
permission.
D. Backfilling for Bridges, Underpasses, Overpasses and Miscellaneous Structures
D.1 Backfill placed around culverts, abutments and piers, shall be deposited on both sides
to approximately the same elevation at the same time. Special care shall be taken to
prevent any wedging action against the structure and slopes bounding the excavation
shall be stepped, where necessary, to prevent such wedge action occurring.
D.2 All backfill intended to support false workloads, including temporary fills and pier
backfill, shall be designed for the minimum support required. As a minimum, such
material shall be AASHTO M 145, Class A-1-a, A-1-b or A-2-4, compacted to 90%
AASHTO T 180 maximum density.

50
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

D.3 Backfill material for bridge abutments and approach embankments within 20 m of any
part of the substructure shall be AASHTO M 145, Class A-1-a, A-1-b or A-2-4
compacted to 95% AASHTO T 180 maximum density up to the underside of the sub
grade layer. The 200 mm minimum thickness of sub grade layer shall consist of
approved sub grade material placed and compacted to 100% maximum density as
specified under Section 2.05 - "Sub grade Construction". The backfill shall be
completed to the level of the original ground or to the top elevation of any adjacent
embankment.
D.4 Backfill around retaining walls shall be completed to the level of the original ground
line and to such heights above original ground line or to the levels as shown on the
Drawings. Care shall be exercised to prevent forward movement of the wall.
D.5 Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, when special permeable backfill (sheathing)
is to be placed against the back faces of abutments, retaining walls or wing walls, it
shall consist of a continuous covering of approved type proprietary filter cloth
protected by a continuous wall of 200 mm minimum thickness precast, porous (no-
fines) concrete blocks laid in stretcher bond with dry joints. Prior to construction of
the block wall, the proposed under drain system indicated on the drawings shall be
laid along the base of the wall under the sheathing.
D.6 The Contractor shall complete the backfill around box culverts to the level of the
original ground line and to the full width of excavation area. If the top of culvert
extends above the original ground line the Contractor shall continue the backfill to the
top of culvert and for a width of 3 m on each side of the culvert for the full width of
highway embankment. If the embankment is in place at the time of backfilling, the
Contractor shall backfill around the culvert to the top of embankment.
D.7 Miscellaneous structures shall be backfilled in accordance with the methods specified.
Compaction of backfill when structures are outside the roadway right-of-way or in
approach roads, minor roads or similar areas, shall be to 90% of maximum density as
determined by AASHTO T 180 (Method D).
3-2-4-4 EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
A. Scope
A.1 These Works shall consist of constructing road embankments, including preparation of
the areas upon which they are to be placed; placing and compacting approved material
within areas where unsuitable material has been removed; and placing and compacting
approved embankment material in holes, pits and other depressions within the right-
of-way area, all in accordance with the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the
Drawings.
B. Materials
B.1 Material of classes A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5 or A3 "when confined" groups as in AAHSTO
M145 and complying with Table 2.1 shall be used when available, except for rock fill
embankments. If material of this character is not available then materials from A-2-
6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, groups (AASHTO M145) may be used provided it complies with
Table 2.1; however, special attention should be given to the construction.
Table 2.2: Soil Suitable for Embankment
1- Maximum dry density not less than 1.7 (AASHTO T-180D)
2- Organic matter not more than 5% (AASHTO T-267)
3- No use of A-6, A-7 soil (AASHTO M-145)

51
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

4- Maximum size not more than 1/2 of the


layer thickness
5- Plasticity Index (PI) less than 20%
6- 4 day soaked C.B.R. should not be less than 8% (AASHTO T-193) when compacted at
100% maximum dry density in accordance with AASHTO T-180 Method D

B.2 The 200 mm depth of embankment sub grade layer immediately below the bottom of
sub base shall consist of selected sub grade material having a 4-day soaked CBR of at
least 20% when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 193 and with a gradation and
P.I. as specified under Section 3-2-5 "Sub grade Construction".
B.3 The 600 mm depth of embankment immediately below the sub grade layer shall
consist of material having a 4-day soaked C.B.R of at least 15% when compacted to
95% maximum dry density in accordance with AASHTO T-180D and tested in
accordance with AASHTO T-193 with a P.I. not more than 15%. If rock fill is used
for the bottom 400 mm depth then these requirements shall apply to the top 200 mm
below the sub grade layer.
B.4 In areas subject to flooding and prolonged inundation of the embankment, such as at
bridge and culvert sites, the material used in embankment, unless rock, shall conform
to AASHTO M 145, Class A-1-a, A-1-b, A-2-4.
B.5 Where embankments are to be constructed using material classified as A3 (AASHTO
M 145) or other material subject to side slope erosion or requiring confinement for
stabilization purposes, the embankment plating or confining layer shall be constructed
using AASHTO M 145 Class A-1-a, A-1-b, or A-2-4 materials or as otherwise
approved.
B.6 The material used in rockfill embankments shall consist predominantly of rock
fragments of such size that the material can be placed in layers of the thickness
prescribed conforming to the requirements stated in Table 2.2.
Table 2.3: Rock Suitable for Embankment
1- Maximum particle size 300 mm or 1/2 or proposed loose layer
thickness whichever is less
2- Passing 0.42mm (Sieve No. 40) 25% maximum
3- Uniformity coefficient, Cu ….. 6 minimum, where Cu = D60/D10
D60 = the Particle size at which 60% passes
D10 = the Particle size at which 10% passes
B.7 Rockfill material shall be obtained from roadway or tunnel excavation and shall be
sound, dense, hard and durable rock capable of being spread and compacted as
specified. Individual pieces are to be clean and angular. It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to excavate material from rock cuts, whether by blasting or other
manner, so that all excavated materials are of suitable size.
B.8 When suitable materials of widely divergent characteristics are drawn from different
sources, such materials may, if approved, be mixed to meet the embankment
requirements. Rock and other materials shall be incorporated in such manner as to
avoid segregation and an accumulation of boulders, etc at the toe of embankment
slopes.

52
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B.9 Logs, trees, stumps, weeds, heavy grass, frozen soil, vegetable matter or other
undesirable and noncompactible materials shall not be placed in embankments.
B.10 Rocks, broken concrete or other solid materials larger than 100 mm in any dimension
shall not be used as fill material in areas where piling works are to be carried out.
C. Workmanship
C.1 Prior to placing embankment material on any area, it shall have been cleared and
grubbed as specified in Sub-Section (3-2-2-1) Clearing and Grubbing", and the
foundation prepared as specified herein.
C.2 Equipment used for foundation preparation and for placing, spreading and compacting
embankment materials shall be of approved types and furnished in sufficient numbers
for the purposes intended. Provision and use of such equipment shall conform with the
relevant requirements set in these specifications and to the Contractor's approved
Work Program.
C.3 Draglines shall not be used to construct embankment unless approval is given and
only when special procedures are adopted to keep the layers uniform and the
embankment properly graded and well-drained at all times.
C.4 Surfaces of embankment layers shall be kept properly shaped and drained at all times.
The Contractor shall utilize a sufficient number of motor graders or tractors to level
and maintain the surface of each layer of embankment during all placing and
compacting operations.
C.5 Rockfill shall not be used in the top 200 mm of the embankment below the subgrade.
Water must be added as required, and with the approval of the Engineer, to achieve
maximum compaction.
C.6 Whenever feasible, trucks, scrapers, tractors, loaders and other heavy hauling
equipment shall be routed over the embankment in such a manner as will contribute
effectively to compaction of the fill material.
C.7 Where an embankment is to be constructed over an area previously occupied by a
building basement, cellar, irrigation canal, well, any previous excavation, or adjacent
to structures, and where the proper use of normal compaction equipment is not
practicable, the embankment shall be constructed and compacted in accordance with
the backfilling requirements of the relevant sub-sections herein before, until the use of
normal compaction equipment is practicable. Layers shall not exceed 200 mm
thickness (after compaction) and shall be compacted to the degree of compaction
specified for the embankment.
C.8 Each embankment layer shall be tested and approved prior to placing the following
layer in accordance with Subsection D "Testing" here below.
C.9 The Engineer may at any time order suspension of delivery of materials to the
embankment Sites until previously delivered materials have been properly placed and
preceding layers are leveled and uniformly compacted to the specified density.
C.10 Unacceptable material placed in any embankment shall be removed and disposed of
by the Contractor at his expense.
C.11 The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all embankments and shall
replace all embankment sections which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have been
damaged or displaced due to carelessness or neglect on the part of the Contractor, or
due to normally occurring natural causes, such as storms, and not attributable to the
unavoidable movement of the natural ground upon which the embankment is
constructed.

53
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

C.12 All embankment side slopes shall be neatly finished true to the lines and not steeper
than the slope angles as shown on the Drawings. The bottom (toe) of side slopes shall
be graded to a well rounded, smooth profile to blend in with the adjacent terrain.
C.13 The side slopes of rockfill embankments shall be thoroughly blanketted with A-1, A-
2-4 material, and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C.14 The Engineer may permit the Contractor to utilize suitable surplus material at his own
expense to widen embankments or flatten slopes, etc within the right-of-way. Surplus
material used in such manner shall be compacted to 90 per cent of maximum density,
but this shall not be measured for payment. When widening embankments, the
Contractor shall bear the cost of modifying the culverts and any protection work
necessary.
C.15 Rockfill shall not be used within 5m of a structural element (next to bridge abutments
footings, etc)
C.16 Rockfill shall not be used for 600mm on top and bottom of Box and Pipe Culverts.
Subgrade material shall be used in these areas up to width excavated for structures.
C.17 If shown on the Drawings, or as required by the Engineer, a trial embankment shall be
constructed. The trial section shall be at least 2 lanes wide by 100 m long at approved
locations at or adjacent to the Site. Compaction and other equipment used, shall be as
specified and listed in the Contractor Equipment Schedule and approved Programmed
of work.
C.18 If the original surface upon which embankment is to be placed is an existing roadbed,
the surface shall be plowed, scarified, or otherwise broken up regardless of the height
of the embankment to be placed thereon.
C.19 Unacceptable material placed in any embankment shall be removed and disposed of
by the Contractor at his expense.
C.20 Where embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides or where new
embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments or where embankment
is built part width at a time, the slopes steeper than 3:1 (H:V) when measured at right
angles to the highway centerline shall be continuously benched as the embankment is
brought up in layers. Benching shall be of sufficient width to permit operation of
spreading and compaction equipment, and in any case not less than 2 m wide except
where insufficient width is available between existing and new embankments. Each
horizontal cut shall begin at the intersection of the original ground and the vertical
sides of the previous cuts. The vertical face of each bench shall not be less than 1 m in
height and not exceed 2 m. Authorized benching shall be measured as highway
excavation.
C.21 Where embankment is to be placed and compacted on wadi slopes, the entire slope
area shall be graded and trimmed to remove any vertical faces and overhangs. The
final graded slope shall not be steeper than 1.5:1 (H:V). The slope shall then be
continuously benched as the embankment is brought up in layers, all as described
above for embankment on hillsides.
C.22 Rockfill shall not be placed on any slopes steeper than 1:1. All slopes steeper than 1:1
shall therefore be regarded to a slope of 1:1 or shallower and all vertical faces and
overhangs removed.
C.23 Roadway embankment consisting of soil or granular material shall be placed in
horizontal layers not exceeding 250 mm thickness (before compaction), shall be
compacted as specified and shall be approved prior to placing the next layer. The
thickness of the first layer over areas of Class A-3 dune sand may exceed 250 mm in

54
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

order to bridge these areas. Approximately uniform thickness of each layer shall be
achieved prior to compaction. As the compaction of each layer progresses, continuous
leveling and working of the material shall be carried out to ensure uniform density.
The correct moisture content shall be maintained at all times.
C.24 Where embankments are to be constructed to a height in excess of 1.5 m above top of
original ground level the Engineer may approve layer thickness up to 300 mm (before
compaction) if the Contractor's equipment and the nature of the material result in the
required density throughout the layer thickness.
C.25 When the moisture content of the embankment material does not fall within the
required moisture range, (optimum moisture ± 2%) water shall be added and
thoroughly mixed into the soil by approved methods or the material shall be aerated,
whichever is necessary to adjust the material to the required moisture content.
C.26 When water is added to embankment material, the amount added shall be sufficient to
provide moisture content within the required range plus a reasonable additional
amount to compensate for evaporation and other unavoidable losses. Water added in
excess of this amount shall be removed by aereation or other approved means at the
Contractor's expense. Satisfactory methods and sufficient equipment shall be used for
the furnishing and handling of the water in a manner that will minimize loss due to
evaporation or waste.
C.27 Embankments that consist of rock-soil material with sufficient soil to make rolling
feasible, shall be placed and compacted in an approved manner and to the required
degree of compaction. Water shall be added as and when directed to assist in the
compaction of such materials.
C.28 In the case of embankments which are to be formed of approved rock-soil material
containing an appreciable quantity (normally not exceeding 30% greater than 80mm)
of rock fragments and which cannot be placed in layers of the thickness prescribed
without crushing, pulverizing, or otherwise breaking down the fragments, the
embankment may be constructed in layers not exceeding in thickness twice the
average size of the largest rock fragments and in any case not exceeding 600 mm
(before compaction).
C.29 Rockfill materials shall be placed in such a manner that the larger rocks are well
distributed and the voids are filled to the maximum practical extent by smaller
particles, each layer shall be bladed into a neat and homogeneous mass prior to
compaction. Any rocks found protruding from the leveled surface shall be removed
and replaced by smaller particles. Initial breakdown compaction shall be performed
with heavy bulldozers. The top level of each layer must be surveyed before and after
compaction and approved by the Engineer before the next layer is placed. Oversize
rock pieces may be used in high rockfill embankments to a level 3 metres below
subgrade.
D. Testing
D.1 The Engineer shall test the compaction of embankment materials in accordance with
these Specifications to ensure that adequate compaction or consolidation has been
achieved. All such tests shall be fully documented by the Contractor, in an approved
manner.
D.2 In the case of cohesion less, free draining rock-soil materials, where maximum density
tests fail to produce a well defined moisture - density relationship, the relative density
test shall be used, alternatively an electronic compaction meter or any other approved
test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor and used to determine the degree of

55
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

compaction achieved.
D.3 To determine the degree of compaction for embankment consisting of rock fill,
average differential settlement values shall also be determined from surveys of an
adequate number of grid point elevations as and when directed, at the commencement
of, during and after embankment construction.
D.4 If it is required to determine the modulus of soil reaction by the Plate Bearing test, this
shall be undertaken using the method given in AASHTO T222-81 (1986).
E. Standards of Compaction for Soil and Granular Materials
E.1 The following compaction standards shall apply to embankment materials other than
predominantly rock materials. The "maximum density" of soil type materials shall be
the modified maximum density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180
(Method D). The "relative density" shall be the relative density determined in
accordance with ASTM D4254, which identifies the state of compactness of the
material with respect to its loosest and densest state. The relative density shall be the
standard to which the field density is referred for comparison in the case of cohesion
less, free draining granular materials.
E.2 Soil type materials shall be compacted to at least 90% modified maximum density for
the full depth of embankment. The 600 mm of embankment material immediately
below the sub grade layer shall be compacted to at least 95% modified maximum
density. Moisture content shall be within plus or minus 2% of optimum at the time of
compaction.
E.3 Cohesion less, free draining granular materials (of 75 mm maximum size and with not
more than 15% passing 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve) shall be compacted to at least 70%
of relative density for the full depth of embankment. The 600 mm depth of such
material immediately below the sub grade layer shall be compacted to at least 75% of
relative density.
E.4 Minimum soil tests required during the construction of sub grade and/or embankment
are:
 One sample for CBR, classification (AASHTO M145), and laboratory
(Moisture - density) or relative density compaction from each source prior to
use. Each sample shall represent not more than 5,000 cu m.
 One sample for classification representing not more than 3,000 cubic meters
of the material in use.
 For every completed layer, one field density shall be determined for each
1500 sq.m or 100 linear meters whichever is less. Testing shall be in
accordance with ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167.
3-2-4-5 PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE TRENCHES
A. Granular Bedding and Backfill materials
A.1 Backfilling above pipe crest shall be with clean granular Class A-3 in layers 30 cm
thick and shall pass sieve No. (4) 4.75 mm, and be retained by sieve No. (200) 0.075
mm.
A.2 Granular material for pipe bedding shall be composed of 14 mm maximum size
natural gravel, crushed gravel or crushed rock, free from dirt, clay, roots, organics and
other deleterious material mixed with sufficient sand to fill the voids, about 30 to 35%
by volume.
A.3 Granular bedding shall conform to the following:

56
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Standard Sieve size % By Weight Passing


(mm) for rigid pipes PE pipes
(DI or AC etc.)
19.0 (3/4 in) 100
4.76 (No. 4) 25-100 100
1.19 (No. 16) 10-75 25-75
0.300 (No. 50) 5-30 10-30
0.177 (No. 80) 3-10 3-10
0.075 (No. 200) 0-5 0-5

A.4 For GRP pipes bedding shall be of graded crushed stone 2.83-8 mm or as
recommended by Manufacturer.
A.5 Sand bedding and fill up to 300 mm minimum above crown of the pipe shall be non-
plastic, natural well graded sand having hard, strong, durable angular particles. It shall
be clean and free from extraneous materials, clay balls, organic matter or other
detrimental material. The amount of fines passing sieve No. 200 shall not exceed 15%
or according to the standard specifications (ASTM C33).
A.6 Backfill over a pipe shall consist of two different layers: the fist layer will be from
selected initial material from the excavated soil as an Initial backfill the second will
be from main re fill material till the level of the ground level.
A.7 Backfill in contact with the pipes and up to 300 mm minimum above crown of the
pipe shall be selected material
A.8 Selected fill material shall comply with group type GW, GP, GM, BC, SW, SP, SM, SL
in compliance with ASTM D 2487.
A.9 Selected fill material shall not contain ashes, cinder, refuse, rubbish, organic material, or
the like. The material shall be capable of being compacted without the use of heavy
rammers.
A.10 The main backfill (for the remainder of the trench) shall be done with suitable material
either from material removed in the course of excavating the trench, or imported from
approved borrow pit. In either case the backfill material shall conform to paragraph B
of section 3-2-4-2 herein before.
A.11 Pipelines should be covered by plain concrete if the top cover is less than 1 m or for
deep pipelines as per the manufacturer recommendations.
B. Workmanship: Backfilling
B.1 Trenches shall not be backfilled at joints until after that section of the pipeline has
successfully passed the specified tests required
B.2 Selected backfill or surround up to a level of 300 mm above top of the pipe shall be
placed and hand compacted in 150 mm layers. The backfill shall be brought up evenly
on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. Care shall be taken to ensure
thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe.
B.3 For GRP pipe initial backfill shall be compacted to 95% relative density or as
recommended by manufacturers.

57
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B.4 Main backfill shall be placed and well compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm
thick before compaction. Heavy compactors shall not be used until there is 600 mm
cover over pipes.
B.5 Compaction of each layer shall be according to Section 3-2-4-2 paragraph J herein
before.
B.6 Heavy steel or pneumatic rollers shall not be used for compacting backfill to pipe
trenches. Special precautions shall be taken to safeguard existing structures when steel
or pneumatic rollers are used.
B.7 Compaction equipment shall be suited to the type of material and shall be subject to
approval. Compaction around foundation walls, culverts and small restricted areas
shall be carried out by mechanical vibratory plates, tampers or hydraulic compactors.
B.8 Backfilling trenches for pipes with concrete beds and or surrounds shall not start
before 24 hours after placing the concrete. Heavy compactors shall not be used and
traffic shall not be allowed before the elapse of 72 hours after placing the concrete.
B.9 When the material is too wet from rain or excessive application of water, no
compaction shall be done. In this case the work shall be suspended until the previously
placed and new materials have dried sufficiently to permit proper compaction. Other
measures shall be taken if necessary to obtain proper compaction.
B.10 Temporary crossing are to be provided over trenches to prevent construction traffic
damaging pipes after backfilling.
B.11 The top 500 mm of pipe trenches below road pavement layers shall be filled with
crushed aggregate base course material compacted to 95% of maximum dry density.
B.12 If authorized by the Engineer, the main backfill may be consolidated using water-
jetting, pudding, or tamping as directed.
C. Restoration of surfaces
C.1 Restoration of asphalt, concrete, gravel pavements and the likes shall be of materials
and thickness to match the existing pavement. All works, workmanship material shall
be in accordance with concerned authorities specifications (Directorate, Municipality,
Ministry of transport) and Engineer direction.
C.2 Restoration of pavement shall be done according to the existing pavement quality and
level to ensure that new pavement is matching to provide uniform surface with the
existing profile.
C.3 Grassed areas shall be restored by spreading, after backfilling, approved fertile soil
over affected area. Seeding, fertilizers and water shall be applied until grass is restored
to its former condition.
C.4 Surface grading shall be carried out to restore all un-surfaced areas and any adjoining
areas disturbed to provide a level, smooth surface.
C.5 The Contractor shall proceed with restoration of surfaces as soon after completion of
other work as is practicable, but in no case more than 10 days after backfilling of
trenches and other excavated areas. Restoration shall be completed within 20 days
from the start of restoration or as approved by the concerned authorities.
3-2-5 SUBGRADE CONSTRUCTION
3-2-5-1 GENERAL
A. These Works shall consist of furnishing materials, constructing the sub-grade layer
and preparing the sub-grade surface ready to receive the pavement structure and
shoulders, all as and where shown on the Drawings.

58
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B. Sub-grade layer is the 200 mm minimum depth of selected material immediately


below the sub-grade surface, or as defined in the drawings or directed by the Engineer.
3-2-5-2 MATERIALS
A. The supplied material shall not contain any organic or harmful material e.g: tree,
leaves, roots, and residues.
B. The supplied material shall conform to classification types: A-1-a, A-1-b, A-2-4,
according to MRDTM 210 (Directorate of Material and Research at the MOC).
C. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, sub-grade material shall consist of selected
material having a 4-day soaked CBR of not less than 25% when tested in accordance
with AASHTO T 193 when compacted at 100% of modified proctor AASHTO (T-
180) and having a maximum P.I. of 12% unless otherwise noted. Sub-grade gradation
shall be reasonably smooth without gap grading. All material shall pass 75 mm sieve
and not more than 18% shall pass 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.
D. The maximum dry density shall not be less than 95% when tested according to
Directorate of Material and Research at the MOC.
E. The material shall be well graded passing sieve no. 3 (75 mm sieve) and shall contain
fine material for proper compaction.
F. Minimum tests required on sub grade are indicated in sub-Section 3-2-4-4
"Embankment Construction".
3-2-5-3 WORKMANSHIP
A. Subgrade in Cut
A.1 Where the subgrade is located in rock, the sub-grade, unless shown otherwise on the
Drawings, shall be undercut to a depth of 200 mm by drilling or blasting as directed.
No rock shall project more than 50 mm above the undercut surface elevation. The sub-
grade layer shall then be constructed using approved sub-grade material, as specified
for sub-grade in embankment.
A.2 Where the subgrade is on in-situ soil that is of a quality and CBR value at least equal
to those specified for sub-grade, the 200 mm depth of such material immediately
below top of sub-grade shall be scarified and all roots, sod, vegetable and other
undesirable matter and stones larger than 75 mm in any dimension shall be removed.
The material shall then be brought to uniform moisture content within the specified
range and compacted to 100% AASHTO T 180 (Method D) maximum density.
A.3 Where the subgrade is on in-situ soil which is unsuitable for retention as the sub-grade
layer, such material immediately below the top of subgrade layer shall be sub-
excavated to a depth of 200 mm, hauled away and disposed off unless approved for
use as embankment fill. The subgrade layer shall then be constructed using approved
subgrade material, as specified for subgrade in embankment. If the material below
subgrade layer does not satisfy the requirement of top 600 mm, it shall be excavated
for further 200 mm and replaced by suitable material to satisfy the requirements of
subgrade.
A.4 The underlying natural material shall be scarified, leveled and rolled. The surface of
the natural soil shall be approved by the Engineer before placement of suitable
material.
B. Subgrade in Embankment
B.1 The 200 mm minimum depth of embankment immediately below top of subgrade
shall consist of selected, approved sub-grade material. The material shall be spread in

59
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

one layer over the full width of the top of embankment, brought to a uniform moisture
content within the specified range and compacted to 100% AASHTO T 180 (Method
D) medium density.
C. Surface Tolerances
C.1 All finished elevations, lines and grades shall be in accordance with the details shown
on the Drawings. Each cross section shall be checked at maximum intervals of 25 m,
at each change in cross slope and elsewhere as directed.
C.2 The tolerances on elevations of finished sub-grade, top of embankment under the sub-
grade layer and sub-excavated (undercut) surface shall be as follows:

Surface Tolerance
Finished Sub-grade: Soil +10 or -30 mm
Rock (if approved) +50 or -50 mm
Top of Embankment or Sub-excavated +10 or -30mm
Surface

For agricultural roads, tolerances on elevations are allowed to be as follows:


Surface Tolerance
Finished Sub-grade: Soil +20 or -30 mm
Rock (if approved) +50 or -50 mm
Top of Embankment or Sub-excavated +20 or -30mm
Surface
C.3 When the finished subgrade surface is tested with a 4 m long straightedge placed
parallel to, or at right angles to the centerline, the maximum depression of the surface
from the testing by straight edge shall be 30 mm.
D. Maintenance of Finished Subgrade
D.1 The finished and approved sub-grade shall be continuously maintained in a smooth,
well compacted and properly drained condition until the sub-base (or base) course is
constructed. Reapproval of the subgrade will be required if the overlying course is not
constructed within 14 days of sub-grade completion or if the subgrade layer is
damaged by traffic or any other causes prior to the placement of the sub-base layer.
3-2-6 GABIONS
3-2-6-1 GENERAL
A. The work shall include the supply of all material, preparation of gabions and their
installation as indicated on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. Such works
will be constructed for protection in valleys and flooding areas.

3-2-6-2 MATERIALS
A. Gabions shall consist of approved type galvanized steel wire mesh baskets (or other
approved types such as heavy-duty plastic mesh) filled with selected rocks before
installation.

60
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B. Galvanized steel wire mesh shall conform to ASTM a 390 Class 3 or equivalent and
with the requirements shown on the Drawings. The wire mesh shall be twisted to
form hexagonal or rectangular openings of uniform size. The maximum nominal
opening size shall be 100 mm. Mesh shall be constructed so as to resist pulling apart
at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a
section is cut.
C. Baskets shall be furnished in one or more sizes that can be assembled to provide the
minimum dimensions, stability, and structural integrity of the installation specified.
Sizes of gabion baskets will normally be 2 m long by 1 m wide by 0.5 m to 1 m high.
Non-standard sizes shall be provided to suit the particular installation, as shown on the
Drawings.
D. Baskets shall be fabricated in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid, and diaphragms
can be assembled on Site into rectangular baskets of the specified sizes. Gabion
baskets shall be of single unit construction. Long gabions assembled with diaphragms
between adjacent baskets, for use as foundation mattresses, etc., may not require lids.
E. Base, lid, ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these
members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that strength
and flexibility at the point of connection is at least equal to that of the mesh.
F. All perimeter edges of the mesh forming the basket shall be securely clip bound or
selvedge so that the joints formed by tying the selvedges have at least the same
strength as the body of the mesh.
G. Perimeter (edge), tie, and connection wires shall conform to ASTM a 641, Class 3,
Medium Temper, and the minimum diameters shown on the Drawings.
H. Riprap material for filling of gabion baskets shall consist of rocks conforming to
Riprap Class A size, clean, strong, durable and highly resistant to weathering.
Dimensions shall range from 250 mm to approximately 125 mm diameters. Not more
that 5% shall be smaller than 100 mm.
3-2-6-3 CONSTRUCTION
A. The surfaces upon which gabions and similar slope protection works are to be placed
shall be excavated and compacted to the required grades and lines and a footing trench
where specified, shall be excavated along the toe of the slopes, all as shown on the
Drawings or as directed. Subgrade or base shall be firm or compacted as directed.
B. Each gabion basket shall be assembled by binding together all vertical edges with wire
ties on approximately 150 mm spacing or by use of a continuous piece of connecting
wire stitched around the vertical edges with a coil every 100 mm.
C. Empty gabion units shall be installed to line and grade as shown on the Drawings.
Wire ties or connecting wire shall be used to join the units together in the same
manner as described for assembling. Internal tie wires shall be uniformly spaced and
securely fastened in each cell of the structure. A standard fence stretcher, chain fall,
or iron rod may be used to stretch the wire baskets and hold alignment.
D. The gabions shall be filled with riprap as specified, placed by hand or machine to
assure alignment and avoid bulges with minimum voids. Alternate placing of rock
and connection wires shall be performed until the gabion is filled. After filling with
riprap, the lid shall be bent over until it meets the sides and edges, and shall be secured
to the sides, ends, and diaphragms with wire ties or connecting wire in the manner
described for assembling.
3-2-7 STONE PITCHING IN CONCRETE

61
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

3-2-7-1 GENERAL
A. These works will be constructed in valleys and flooding areas.
B. Stone pitching shall consist of broken stones, placed as indicated on the Drawings or
in locations as directed by the Engineer.
C. Stone pitching shall be constructed to the shape and dimensions shown on the
Drawings in accordance with the provisions of the specification or as directed by the
Engineer.
D. Stone pitching shall be classified as stone pitching in concrete and shall have a
thickness of 200 mm, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
3-2-7-2 MATERIALS
A. Rock
A.1 The stones for this work shall be durable, angular field or quarry stones of approved
quality, sound, hard, free from seam and other structural defects and shall have a
specific gravity of not less than 2.40. At least 60% of the stone pitching shall consist
of pieces having a weight of not less than 15 kg and of the remaining 40% no piece
shall have a weight of less than 7 kg. The thickness of each layer shall be achieved by
the thickness of one rock piece. The thickness of the rock piece shall be within 50mm
from the specified layer thickness, measured at the thinnest section of the rock piece.
B. Concrete
B.1 Concrete used for filling shall be of the same class as blinding concrete.
3-2-7-3 PLACING
A. Ground surface to be protected by stone pitching shall be thoroughly compacted to the
approval of the Engineer and covered with 50 mm blinding concrete prior to placing
of the rock.
B. Rock shall be placed starting with the lowest point of slopes.
C. Approval of the Engineer is required for rock laying prior to pouring concrete. The
rock shall then be flushed with water to provide adequate bonding with concrete.
Concrete paring shall start with the lowest point of the area to be protected. Where
more than one layer of stone pitching is specified, or in keys, a layer of 50 mm
blinding concrete shall be placed below the first layer and between consecutive layers.
D. The finished surface of the concrete shall be flush with the top of the surrounding
stone pieces.
3-2-8 GEOTEXTILES
3-2-8-1 GENERAL
A. Geotextiles are used for protection and containment of the granular bedding and the
first dump layer around GRP pipes in the presence of water table in the trench.
B. The work include the supply and installation of geotextile fabric as indicated on the
Drawings.

3-2-8-2 MATERIAL
A. Drainage Fabric
A.1 Non-woven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made from
polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties

62
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:


 Grab Tensile Strength: 490 N (ASTM D 4632)
 Tear Strength: 178 N (ASTM D 4533)
 Puncture Resistance: 222 N (ASTM D 4833)
 Water Flow Rate: 100 l/sec/m2 (ASTM D 4491)
 Apparent Opening Size: 0.3 mm (ASTM D 4751)
B. Separation Fabric
B.1 Woven geotextile, specifically manufactured for use as a separation geotextile; made
from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum
properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test
methods:
 Grab Tensile Strength: 890 N (ASTM D 4632)
 Tear Strength: 333 N (ASTM D 4533)
 Puncture Resistance: 400 N (ASTM D 4833)
 Water Flow Rate: 2.7 l/sec/m2 (ASTM D 4491)
 Apparent Opening Size: 0.6 mm (ASTM D 4751)
3-2-8-3 WORKMANSHIP
Store and handle geotextiles in accordance with ASTM D 4873. Place and
install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and as follows,
to the approval of the Engineer.
 Overlaps shall not, in any case, be less than 25 mm
 Place bedding layer as soon as possible after placement of the geotextile, in
accordance with approved methods, to thickness shown on Drawings
 Remove and replace any geotextile damaged or punctured either before, during
or after laying.

3-3 PAVEMENT AND ROADS SURFACE FINISHING

3-3-1 SCOPE
These works cover the supply of materials and construction of all components of the
roadwork specified in this Project. The roadwork components include: sub-base and
base courses, bituminous materials, pavement repairs and trench reinstatement and
maintenance of traffic and detours.

3-3-2 GRANULAR SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES


3-3-2-1 GENERAL
A. Contractors Responsibility
A.1 The Contractor shall locate sources of material, ensure adequate supply and ensure
compliance with the Specifications.
A.2 The Contractor shall obtain and test, in an approved laboratory, samples from sources
and stockpiles which are in compliance with the Specifications.
A.3 Samples provided by the Contractor shall satisfy all specified test requirements. The
Contractor shall permit the Engineer to inspect any and all materials used or to be
used, at any time during or after their preparation, or while being used during progress

63
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

of the Works. Unsatisfactory materials, whether in place or not, shall be removed


promptly from the Site. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, transport,
tools and equipment required by the Engineer for such inspection.
A.4 The Contractor shall ensure that screening plants or crushing and screening plants
shall not be put into operation prior to their approval. If, after any plant is put into
operation, it fails to perform as intended, the Contractor shall either rectify the defects
in the existing plant to the satisfaction of the Engineer, or shall provide alternative
approved plant.
A.5 Approval of the crushing and screening plants and other equipment shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities in respect of producing granular materials
and aggregates which conform to the Specifications and in the quantities required for
the completion of the Works on time.
A.6 The Contractor shall conduct necessary tests in the Field Laboratory in the presence of
the Engineer and the Contractor’s Materials Engineer.
A.7 Processed materials shall be tested and approved before being stockpiled on Site or
incorporated in the works and may be inspected and tested at any time during their
preparation, storage and use. Questionable materials, awaiting testing and approval,
shall not be unloaded and mixed with materials previously approved. If the grading
and quality of any materials delivered to the Site does not conform to the grading and
quality of the established control samples, the Engineer will reject such materials.
A.8 Samples shall satisfy all specified test requirements. The Contractor shall permit the
Engineer to inspect any and all materials used or to be used. At any time during or
after their preparation, or while being used during progress of the Works.
Unsatisfactory materials, whether in place or not, shall be removed promptly from the
site. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, transport, tools and equipment
required by the Engineer for such inspections.
A.9 The contractor shall construct in accordance with the concerned authorities
specification.
3-3-2-2 MATERIALS
A. Subbase shall consist of naturally occurring gravel and sand, screened or crushed to
obtain the specified gradation.
B. Base course shall consist of crushed gravel, crushed stone or sand with screenings as
required to obtain the specified gradation.
C. The supplied material shall not contain any organic or harmful material e.g: tree,
leaves, roots, and residues.
D. Material for subbase and base course shall conform to classification types: A-1-a, A-1-
b according to AASHTO classification system.
E. Gravel, crushed gravel and crushed stone shall consist of hard, durable particles, free
from dirt, organic matters, shale and other deleterious materials, and shall not contain
more than 8% of clay lumps and friable particles. The fine material shall pass sieve
no. 4 (4.75 mm) and shall consist of natural sand or crushed fine materials.
F. Physical and chemical properties of granular materials used for subbase and base
courses shall conform to the requirements specified as follows:
F.1 Gradation: Subbase and Base shall conform to the following gradation in accordance
with AASHTO T-27.

64
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Sieve Designation Percent by weight passing


Subbase Base
50 mm (2 inch) 100 -
37.5 mm (1 ½ inch) 90-100 100
25 mm (1 inch) 55-85 70 - 95
19 mm (3/4 inch) 50-80 55-85
9.5 mm (3/8 inch) 40-70 -
4.75 mm (No.4) 30-60 30-60
2.00 mm (No.10) 20-50 -
0.425 mm (No.40) 10-20 10-25
0.075 mm (No.200) 0-15 2-10

F.2 If it is found necessary to add fine material in order to improve graduation


requirements, this material shall pass sieve 0.425 mm (no. 40) and shall be mixed with
the crushed material in the quarry and not in the project site.
F.3 The percent passing no. 200 sieve (0.075 mm) shall not be more than half the percent
passing sieve no. 40 (0.025 mm).
F.4 Other Requirements for Subbase and base are indicated in the following table:

Test/Designation Subbase Base

Clay Content AASHTO T.88 max 5% max 5%


Fines Content AASHTO T.27 - passing No.200
shall be less than
half passing No.40
Los Angeles abrasion AASHTO < 50% < 45%
T.96
C.B.R ASTM D1883  30%  80%
(4 day soaked sample compacted @
100% Modified proctor)
Soundness AASHTO T.104 In Sodium In Sodium
(Max. loss in weight after 5 cycles) Sulphate:  12% Sulphate:  12%
In Magnesium In Magnesium
Sulphate:  18% Sulphate:  18%
Fine aggregate AASHTO For passing No.40 For passing No.40
T.89, T.90 LL  30%, PI  LL  25%, PI 
6% 6%
Percentage of material with at least _____ 90%
one fractured face

65
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

3-3-2-3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Mixing and Spreading
A.1 The Contractor shall thoroughly mix aggregate and water to uniform moisture
content.
A.2 The Contractor shall spread materials on prepared subgrade or subbase in uniform
layers not exceeding the following thickness before compaction:
 For subbase 300 mm
 For base 250 mm
A.3 All segregated material shall be removed and replaced with well-graded material
A.4 The Contractor shall compact each layer to the following density requirements:
 Subbase 100% of maximum density AASHTO T.180
 Base 100% of maximum density AASHTO T.180
A.5 Each layer shall be completely compacted and approved prior to delivery of materials
for the following layer.
B. Tolerance
B.1 The Contractor shall conform to lines, grade and cross sections as shown on the
Drawings.
B.2 Tolerances on elevations for final layer at 20 m intervals and intermediate points as
follows:
 Subbase: +10 mm to - 20 mm
 Base: +10 mm to - 15 mm.
B.3 For agricultural roads, tolerances on elevations shall be as follows:
 Subbase: +20 mm to - 20 mm
 Base: +15 mm to - 15 mm.
B.4 The Contractor shall remove defective sections and replace to correct tolerances.
B.5 The Contractor shall maintain finished course in good condition until succeeding layer
is placed.
C. Testing
C.1 The Contractor shall carry out in-situ testing as directed by concerned authorities
(Municipality/Ministry of Transport) and Engineer or as per the listed-below:
Required Tests Repetition Required for all Tests
1. Proctor Test for every 500 LM for each layer or as
per specifications of the concerned
authorities (Municipality / Governamate /
Ministry of Trasport)
2. Gradation of Materials When materials changed or whenever
instructed by the Engineer
3. Plasticity Index When materials changed or whenever
instructed by the Engineer
4. C.B.R When materials changed or whenever
instructed by the Engineer

66
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

5. Abrasion When materials changed or whenever


instructed by the Engineer
6. Sand equivalent When materials changed or whenever
instructed by the Engineer
7. Clay lumps and friable particles When materials changed or whenever
instructed by the Engineer
8. Field Density When materials changed or whenever
instructed by the Engineer
9. Thickness Test for every 2000 sq.m. and for every
layer

D. Compaction
D.1 Compaction shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 191 or AASHTO T 205. If
there is a delay between the construction of any layer and the following layer, if
necessary and required by the Engineer the compaction of the lower layer may be re-
verified to ensure that it has not loosened due to traffic, passage of construction
equipment, adverse weather conditions or otherwise.

3-3-3 BITUMINOUS LAYERS


3-3-3-1 GENERAL
A. Responsibility
A.1 The Contractor shall locate adequate sources and supply of material conforming with
the specifications.
A.2 The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer.
A.3 The Contractor shall sample and test all materials in an approved laboratory for
compliance with the specification.
A.4 The Contractor shall ensure crushing, screening and sampling materials shall be as
specified in section 3-3-2-1
A.5 The Contractor shall construct as per specification of the concerned authorities
(Municipality / Ministry of Transport).
3-3-3-2 MATERIALS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS COURSES
A. Materials
A.1 The materials specified for use in construction of pavement layers include:
 Coarse and fine mineral aggregate and filler.
 Bitumen products including penetration graded bitumen and cutback bitumen.
A.2 Physical and chemical properties of all materials used in the bituminous mixes and/or
bituminous layer construction shall conform to the requirements outlined in sub-
sections B, C and D below.

B. Aggregates for paving layer


B.1 Aggregate shall be clean, hard, durable and sound and shall consist of crushed stone,
of uniform quality and free from decomposed rock organic matter or shale. Combined
aggregate grading for bituminous mixes including mineral filler shall conform to the
requirements indicated in the table below:
Requirements of gradient layers of gravel below the base

67
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Sieve Designation Percent by weight passing


Binder Course Wearing Course
1" (25.0 mm) 100 ---
¾" (19.0 mm) 75-90 100
½" (12.5 mm) 65-80 90-100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 55-65 78-83
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 35-80 46-60
No. 10 (2.00 mm) 20-35 30-42
No. 40 (0.425 mm) 7-20 14-25
No. 80 (0.180 mm) 5-25 8-16
No. 200 (0.075 mm) 3-7 3-7

B.2 Other Aggregate Requirements:


 Percentage by weight of friable particles, clay lumps, organic material and
shale shall not exceed 1% as determined by AASHTO T-112.
 Aggregate shall not contain more than 1% gypsum and 5% chert.
 The plasticity index of material passing 0.425mm should not exceed 4%.
 90% of crushed particles retained on No. 4 sieve (4.75 mm) shall have at least
2 or more fractured faces.
 Flakiness index and elongation index tested in accordance with B.S. 812 shall
be within the following maximum limits:
 Added mineral filler shall be fine particles of limestone or cement in
accordance with ASTM D-242. It shall be dry and free from organic material
or clay.
 Loss in weight of aggregate after 500 revolutions shall not exceed 35% when
tested in accordance with AASHTO T-96.
 Soundness, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-104 for aggregate
retained on No 4 sieve (4.75 mm) shall not show signs of disintegration, and
the loss in weight after 5 cycles shall not exceed 10% for the sodium sulphate
tests and 12% for the magnesium sulphate test.
 When tested for resistance to water damage in accordance with ASHTO T.
283, the retained strength should be greater than 80%.
 Combined mineral aggregate shall have a sand equivalence value not less than
50 when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-176.
 Aggregates shall be washed if directed to remove any clay lumps, adherent
dust and other deleterious materials.
C. Bitumen Products
C.1 Provide adequate transport and storage facilities for bitumen, and protect from
temperature under -5°C or over + 60° C.
C.2 Sampling of bitumen shall be in accordance with AASHTO T-40.
C.3 Binder and wearing courses shall be plant mixes in accordance with an established Job

68
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Mix Formula (J.M.F)


C.4 The J.M.F. shall be established by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The
mix design procedures shall be in accordance with the Marshall method procedure
given in the Asphalt Institute Manual, M.S-2.
C.5 The J.M.F. shall be re-established if the source of aggregate, filler or bitumen is
changed.
C.6 Unless otherwise specified the bitumen for binder and wearing courses shall be 60/70
penetration graded bitumen and shall conform generally to the requirement of
AASHTO M20.
C.7 The J.M.F. shall conform to table 3.1
Table 3.1: Job Mix Formula

Binder Wearing Course


Course
Number of blows at each end of compacted 75 75
specimen
Stability (Marshall) (Kg) 1000 1000
Flow (Marshall) (mm) 2-4 2-4
Percent Air Voids 4-7 4-6
Percent Voids in Mineral Aggregate (V.M.A.) 14 15
Percent Voids filled with bitumen (V.F.B.) 50 - 70 50 - 75
Loss of Marshall Stability (AAHTO T 165) max 25% max 25%
Filler Bitumen Ratio 0.6 - 1.5 0.6 - 1.4
Bitumen content, percent by weight of total 3.5 - 4.5 3.5 - 4.5
mix.*

* the optimum bitumen content shall be determined during the design mix procedure.
(the given values
are tentative).

C.8 The maximum variations of the project mix from the approved J.M.F. are as shown in
table 3.2:.

Table 3.2: Surface Tolerances


Sieve Designation (square Specified Tolerances
openings)
9.5 mm (3/8 in.) and above + or -5.0%
4.75 mm (No. 4) + or - 4.0%

69
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

2.00 mm (No. 10) + or -4.0%


0.425 mm (No. 40) + or -4.0%
0.18 mm (No. 80) + or -4.0%
0.075 mm (No. 200) + or -1.0%
Bitumen Content to be recommended by the Engineer based on
trials conducted by the Contractor.
Temperature of Mix on discharge + or -50°C
Any deviation from these limits shall be made only with the approval of the
Engineer.
For agricultural roads the specified gradation tolerances above can be increased by  2%.
D. Bituminous Prime and Tack Coats
D.1 Works shall consist of furnishing and applying MC cutback bitumen prime coat to a
previously constructed subgrade, sub-base, aggregate base course, or road shoulders,
and furnishing and applying RC cutback bitumen as a tack coat to a previously
constructed bituminous binder or wearing surface to provide bond for a superimposed
bituminous course; all as and where shown on the Drawings.
D.2 Unless otherwise specified MC-70 shall be used for prime coat. Properties to conform
with AASHTO M82.
D.3 Tack coat shall be RC-70 in accordance with AASHTO M-81.
D.4 Surface for application to be sufficiently dry for Tack coat, and sufficiently moist for
prime coat. Ambient temperature to be more than 10°C and no rain, dust or strong
wind.
D.5 Spraying temperature shall be for RC-70 40 - 75°C. and for MC-70: 45 - 60°C.
D.6 Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The following rates of applications shall be
used.
 Prime coat 0.75 - 2.0 liters/ sq.m
 Tack coat 0.3 - 0.6 Kg/ sq.m
D.7 Prime coat shall be cured for 3 days or as directed by the Engineer.
D.8 Tack coat shall be allowed to dry to a suitable tacky condition before succeeding
asphalt layer is placed.
D.9 Traffic shall not be permitted on surfaces after they have been cleaned and prepared
for prime or tack coat application.
3-3-3-3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Surface Preparation
A.1 When the bituminous mix is to be placed upon a granular subgrade subbase or base
course, the surface shall have been primed and approved by the Engineer.
A.2 When the bituminous mix is to be placed upon an existing bituminous surface, the
surface shall be cleaned of all foreign material and broomed free of dust; to the
approval of the Engineer. If required on the Drawings a tack coat shall be applied
prior to placing the new layer.
B. Delivery Spreading and Finishing
B.1 The maximum temperature of the bituminous mix at the mixing plant shall be 170°C

70
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

when 60 / 70 penetration bitumen is used. The application temperature shall be


between 145°C and 165°C.
B.2 The mix shall be laid by means of a paver, or spreader, and rolled and compacted to
not less than 97% of the average daily Marshall bulk density.
B.3Stacking is supported by rollers with steel cylinder orself-propelled rollers with pneumatic
wheels. Unless the Engineer orders otherwise
B.4 Unless otherwise directed, the schedule of testing shall be as shown in table 3.3.
B.5 The thickness of pavement surface layer equal to the initial pavement layer thickness
with a maximum thickness of 15 cm and with a minimum value of 8 cm and as per the
concerned authorities (Municipality / Government / Ministry of Transport)
Table 3.3: TESTS FOR BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS
(A) Frequency for all (B) Frequency for
Work item Tests at Source tests mentioned Tests at road all tests
under (A) mentioned
of material Site
under (B)
3-1 1. Specific gravity - Test for each
Materials and water source
used in absorption - When materials
Asphalt mix 2. Abrasion test quality changes
(at Batching 3. Chert content - As requested
plant) 4. Clay lumps and
Friable
materials
5. Flaky and
elongated
Particles.
6. Soundness
3-2 1. Gradation - Test for each
Materials 2. Specific gravity source
used in and water - When materials
Asphalt mix absorption. quality changes
(from hot 3. Plasticity index - As requested
bins) 4. Sand equivalent
5. Stripping with
asphalt
3-3 1. Complete mix - For each job mix
Asphalt mix design in - When materials
design each accordance quality changes.
layer (At with American - When results are
batching Asphalt not consistent
plant) Institute (MS2) with the mix
2. Loss of stability design results.
- As requested

71
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

(A) Frequency for all (B) Frequency for


Work item Tests at Source tests mentioned Tests at road all tests
under (A) mentioned
of material Site
under (B)
3-4 At Batching plant - Test each 3 Behind - Test for
Asphalt for 1. Stability working days spreader each
each layer - Tests for each 1. Stability working
2. Flow
batching plant day
3. Extraction 2. Flow
- As requested - Test for
(binder content 3. Extraction
each batch
and gradation) - Once a week (binder
4. Air voids content & - As
- As requested
gradation) requested
5. Voids in
mineral 4. Air voids - Test for
each 200
aggregates 5. Voids in
lin.m, per
6. Daily Marshall mineral
lane and
density aggregates.
for each
7. Loss of Stability 6. Daily layer
Marshall
- As
density
requested
7. Road density
and thickness
(after final
compaction)

C. Tolerances
C.1 Elevation of finished course at intervals not exceeding 10 m shall be maximum 
10mm (or 15 mm for agricultural roads).
C.2 When tested with a 3 m long straightedge, parallel to and perpendicular to the
centerline, the maximum deviation between any two contact points shall not exceed
8 mm for the binder course, and 5 mm for the wearing course (or 10 mm for binder
course and 7 mm for wearing course in case of an agricultural road).
C.3 The combination of permitted tolerances in the levels of the bituminous courses shall
not result in a reduction of thickness of 10 mm from the specified thickness nor a
reduction in the final wearing course by more than 5 mm from that specified.
C.4 Thickness of each bituminous course shall be determined by taking core samples, as
directed by the Engineer.

3-3-4 PAVEMENT REPAIRS AND TRENCH REINSTATEMENT WORKS


3-3-4-1 GENERAL
A. Scope
A.1 Pavement repair and trench reinstatement Works shall consist of removing defective
bituminous pavement, preparing surfaces (after having properly backfilled all trenches
and potholes) to receive repairs, furnishing materials, placing and finishing new
pavement, as and where shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer and the
concerned authorities (Municipality / Governmate / Ministry of Transport).

72
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

3-3-4-2 ASPHALTING
A. Pavement type “A”
Pavement type “A” shall be considered as asphaltic pavement for main roads with a
total thickness for base and pavement layers exceeding 15 cm in addition to a granular
layer below base with thickness greater than 15 cm.
B. Pavement type “B”
Pavement type “B” shall be considered as asphaltic pavement for collection roads with
a total thickness for asphalt of 10 to 15 cm in addition to a granular thickness below
base with thickness exceeding 15 cm.
C. Pavement type “C”
Pavement type “C” shall be considered as asphaltic pavement for roads that are not
main or collection roads and where asphalting is not of type “A” or “B”.
3-3-4-3 MATERIALS
A. General
A.1 All pavement materials shall conform with the relevant requirements and concerned
authorities mentioned in Section 3-3-2-2 "Materials" and Section 3-3-3-2 "Materials
and Requirements for Bituminous Construction".
A.2 Subgrade materials shall conform with the relevant requirements of Section 3-2-5 -
"Subgrade Construction and requirements of concerned authorities.

3-3-4-4 CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR WORKS


A. Preparation of Pavement
A.1 Cracks in bituminous pavement that, in the opinion of the Engineer, do not require
reconstruction shall be prepared by wire brushing and blowing out with compressed
air.
A.2 Defective bituminous pavement which, in the opinion of the Engineer, requires
reconstruction shall be cut back to good material using pneumatic cutting tools.
Excavation of pavement layers for trenching shall also be initiated with pneumatic
tools or milling machines or asphalt saws and later completed with regular excavating
equipment. The cut edges shall be square or rectangular and in line with the direction
of traffic. The depth of cut shall be determined by the Engineer and may include
asphaltic layers, base and sub-base layers and subgrade layers (in the case of failed
pavement, excavation shall include a minimum of 300 mm of subgrade material). All
excavated materials shall be removed and disposed of off-site. When the bottom of
the excavation consists of earth or granular material it shall be thoroughly compacted
using mechanical compactors to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Excavated
bituminous surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and wire brushed prior to receiving
repair materials.
A.3 Utility trench reinstatements in bituminous pavement shall be prepared in the same
way as defective bituminous pavement. Excavation shall include a minimum of
300 mm of subgrade material.
A.4 If cracks are present in asphalt layer due to trench excavation works for sewage and
water network, the Contractor shall reinstate the defects present as below:
- The crack and longitudinal and transverse joints shall be cleaned by a brush and by air.

73
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

- The cracks shall then be filled with bitumen binder after which crushed sand shall be
spread above this binder.
- If settlement is obtained in the existing asphalt then the Contractor shall identify
these locations which shall be saw-cut in a square or rectangular shape with the
suitable equipment and shall then be reinstated as it was before failure.
B. Placing and Finishing Repair Materials
B.1. Cracks of 3 mm width or wider shall be filled with clean, coarse sand then saturated
with 1:1 diluted emulsified bitumen or as directed by the Engineer. Cracks of less than
3 mm shall be filled with emulsified bitumen or as directed by the Engineer. Cracks
shall be filled to the road surface. Any excess bitumen shall be removed with a
squeegee and the bitumen surface shall be sprinkled liberally with coarse sand.
B.2 Excavations below subgrade level shall be filled to a level specified by the Engineer
with subgrade material in layers not exceeding 150 mm and compacted using
mechanical compactors to conform to the requirements of Section 5-2-3 “Subgrade
Construction" and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B.3 Sub-base and/or base course, if required, shall be placed in layers not exceeding
150 mm and compacted using mechanical compactors. They shall comply with the
relevant requirements of Section 3-3-2-3 or as directed by the Engineer.
B.4 Prior to receiving bituminous material the excavations shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Subgrade, sub-base or base course material shall be primed with a light coating of MC
cutback bitumen and existing bituminous surfaces shall be lightly painted with RC
cutback bitumen, all in accordance with the requirements of Section 3-3-3-3.
B.5 The excavation shall be filled with bituminous pavement materials placed in layers not
exceeding 70 mm and compacted using vibratory compactors. Unless ordered to the
contrary by the Engineer, the top layer shall be compacted by steel wheeled roller, first
compact the 150 mm strips adjacent to the traffic edges, then rolling in the direction of
traffic.
B.6 New utility trenches shall be backfilled according to Section 3-2-4 and to the details
shown on the Drawings, or ordered, including any surrounds, meshing or protective
materials. Construction of subgrade and pavement shall be as for pavement repairs.
B.7 No excavated areas shall remain open overnight.
C. Surface Tolerances
C.1 Levels shall be checked by straight edge in relation to the adjacent existing pavement.
C.2 Surface tolerances for bituminous layers shall conform with the relevant requirements
of Section 3-3-3-3.
C.3 Any deficiency in the wearing course surface shall be corrected by cutting out and
replacing.

3-3-5 CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS AND PAVED MEDIANS


3-3-5-1 GENERAL
A. Scope
A.1 These Works shall consist of furnishing materials and constructing concrete/limestone
curbs, gutters, curb-and-gutter combinations and concrete/limestone paving to
sidewalks and medians, using in situ concrete construction precast concrete units or
limestone units, as and where shown on the Drawings. The shapes and installation
details of curbs and gutters, sidewalks, and medians shall be coordinated with the
concerned Authorities. Preparation and construction methods shall comply with the

74
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

requirements of the concerned authorities (Municipality / Government / Ministry of


Transport) or as per the Engineers direction.
3-3-5-2 MATERIALS AND PRECAST MANUFACTURE
A. Concrete
A.1 Portland cement concrete shall be Class 210/20 for all in situ and precast concrete,
except base course and backing concrete which shall be Class 170/60. All concrete
shall conform to the relevant requirements of Section 3-5-1 "Concrete and Concrete
Mixes and Testing" and shall be produced by an approved commercial ready-mix
plant.
B. Mortar
B.1 Mortar shall consist of cement and fine aggregate having the same proportions as used
in the concrete construction and shall conform to all relevant requirements of Section
3-5-1 "Concrete and Concrete Mixes and Testing".
C. Reinforcement
C.1 Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Section 3-5-3"Steel
Reinforcement and Fixing".
D. Precast Concrete Units
D.1 All precast units shall be manufactured to the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
Manufacturing tolerances shall be 3 mm in any one dimension. End and edge faces
shall be perpendicular to the base.
D.2 Each precast curb or gutter unit shall normally be 0.5 m in length and this length shall
be reduced to 0.25 m or as directed, where units are to be installed along curves of less
than 10 m radius.
D.3 For horizontal curves of radius less than 10 m, curb and gutter units shall be
manufactured to the radius shown and in such circumstances where straight elements
or portions of straight elements shall not be used. Wrapped edges and curved faces
shall be of constant radius with a smooth change from radius to plain face.
D.4 Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, precast concrete tiles (paving slabs) shall be
400 mm by 400 mm by 40 mm thickness with 5 mm edge bevel. The tile face shall be
grooved in squares of a size agreed by the Engineer as appropriate to the tile
dimensions. Coloring of the top layer, where required, shall be achieved using
mineral oxides.
D.5 Surfaces of precast units that will be exposed to view after installation, shall be true
and even, with a dense finish of uniform texture and color, free from cracks, holes,
fins, staining or other blemishes or defects. Units failing to meet these requirements
will be rejected. Surfaces that will not be exposed to view after installation shall have
all fins and irregular projections removed and all cavities, minor honeycombing and
other defects made good with mortar after the units have been saturated with water for
at least 3 hours.
D.6 Precast units shall be cast upside down in approved steel molds under conditions of
controlled temperature and humidity. The units shall be steam cured or any other
method approved by the Engineer until the concrete attains the full specified 28-day
strength.
D.7 The Contractor shall submit for approval, samples of each of the proposed units
together with the manufacturer's certificates and details of the method of manufacture
and materials to be used. The Engineer's approval of the samples will not be
considered final and the Engineer may reject any precast units delivered to the Site

75
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

which do not meet the required standards or specifications and requirements of


concerned Authorities.
E. Limestone
E.1 Approved best quality limestone shall be obtained from one strata from one quarry,
delivered in one shipment, free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration or other
defects which adversely affect strength, durability or appearance, thoroughly
seasoned, dressed and worked before delivery to site, and to the sizes shown on the
Drawings, cut square and true with clean edges.
F. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler
F.1 Preformed expansion joint filler shall conform to AASHTO M 33.
G. Epoxy Adhesive
G.1 Epoxy adhesive (for use in attaching precast units to existing concrete pavement
surfaces) shall be a two component epoxy of high viscosity and rapid setting
characteristics, conforming to AASHTO M237, Class II.
H. Ducts
H.1 Ducts (if required under sidewalks or medians) shall consist of uPVC plastic pipe
conforming to DIN 8061/2 or SAS 14 or approved equal. If jacking is required, duct
shall be approved galvanized steel tube.
I. Bedding
I.1 Bedding material shall conform to the relevant requirements of Section 3-3-2
"Granular Sub-base and Base Courses" for Class A or Class B granular material.
3-3-5-3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Edgings and drainage channels made of casting concrete-made of Portland
cement cast in site.
A.1 The subgrade shall be excavated to the grades and sections shown on the Drawings. If
the section is not indicated, the width to be excavated shall be 300 mm each side of the
outside edges of the curb or gutter. The subgrade shall be of approved uniform
density. The subgrade foundation shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 150 mm
and the material replaced with bedding material which shall be compacted to at least
95% AASHTO T180 maximum density. All foundations shall be rolled or compacted
to provide a smooth surface and shall be approved before placing concrete.
A.2 For stationary side form construction forms for curb or gutter shall be of approved
steel type. All forms shall be sufficiently strong and rigid and securely staked and
braced to obtain a finished product correct to the dimensions, lines and grades
required. Forms shall be cleaned and oiled before each use. Forms may be removed
as soon as practicable after concreting, provided no damage results to the curb or
gutter and in any case not until 24 hours after completion of concreting.
A.3 For slip-form construction, curb or gutter may be constructed by use of approved slip-
form or extrusion equipment. The completed curb or gutter shall be true to shape,
grade, and line, and the concrete shall be dense and of the required surface texture.
A.4 Concrete shall be placed upon the previously prepared and moistened sub grade and
shall be consolidated with an approved type internal vibrator. The surface shall be
shaped by use of a steel screed to produce the section shown on the Drawings. The
edges shall be rounded with edgers to form the required radius as shown on the
Drawings.
A.5 Contraction and construction joints of the required types shall be constructed at the

76
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

intervals and locations shown on the Drawings. Adjacent to flexible base or surface
courses, weaker plane contraction joints in curbs or gutters may be constructed by
sawing through the curb to a depth of not less than 30 mm below the surface of the
gutter, or they may be formed by inserting a suitable removable metal template in the
fresh concrete, or by other approved methods. Sealing of the joints will not be
required unless shown on the Drawings.
A.6 Exposed surfaces shall be finished full width with a trowel and edger. The top face of
curbs or gutters shall receive a light brush finish. Forms for the roadway face of curbs
and the top surface of gutters shall be removed 24 hours after concrete has been placed
and finishing of the surfaces shall be carried out, provided the alignment tolerances
and other requirements have been met.
A.7 Tolerances on tangent sections of curb and gutter shall be tested using a 4 m
straightedge. The finished surface of concrete shall not deviate from the straightedge
between any 2 contact points by more than 5 mm. Curved sections shall be true to the
specified radius plus or minus 5 mm and all joints shall be flush and neat in
appearance.
A.8 All fins and irregular projections shall be removed and cavities produced by form ties
and all other small holes, honeycomb spots, broken corners or edges and other defects
shall be rectified. After saturating with water for a period of not less than 3 hours, the
surfaces shall be carefully pointed and made true with mortar. All construction and
expansion joints shall be left carefully tooled and free of all mortar and concrete. Joint
filler shall be left exposed for its full length with clean and true edges. The resulting
surfaces shall be true and uniform.
A.9 A rubbed finish shall then be carried out to surfaces that will be exposed to view after
completion of construction. Before rubbing, the concrete shall be kept saturated with
water for at least 3 hours. Sufficient time shall have elapsed before the wetting down
to allow the mortar used in the pointing of holes and defects to set. Surfaces shall by
rubbed with a medium carborundum stone, using mortar on its face. Rubbing shall
remove all remaining form marks, projections and irregularities, and result in a
uniform surface. The final finish shall involve rubbing with a fine carborundum stone
and water until the entire surface is of a smooth texture and uniform color. After the
surface has dried, loose powder shall be removed and the surface shall be left clean
and free from unacceptable flaws or imperfections.
A.10 Curbs and gutters shall be moist cured until stripped and finished, and then membrane
cured in accordance with the relevant requirements of Section 3-5-2 "Concrete
Handling, Placing and Curing". Curing compound shall be applied immediately
following completion of rubbed finish.
A.11 The area adjacent to completed and accepted curbs and gutters shall be backfilled with
approved material to the top edges of the curbs or gutters or to the elevations shown
on the Drawings. Backfill shall be placed and compacted to 95% AASHTO T180
maximum density.
B. Precast Concrete/Limestone Curbs and Gutters
B.1 Sub grade for the concrete base shall be constructed as for in situ curbs and gutters.
B.2 Forms for the concrete base shall be approved wood or steel. All forms shall be
sufficiently strong and rigid and securely staked and braced to obtain a finished
product correct to the dimensions, lines and grade required. Forms shall be cleaned
and oiled before each use. If approved, forms for the concrete base may be omitted
and the concrete placed directly against undisturbed excavated faces.

77
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B.3 Base course concrete shall be placed, compacted and shaped to the sections shown on
the Drawings. Concrete shall be compacted with an approved internal type vibrator or
if approved, by hand spudding and tamping. Edges shall be rounded if necessary by
the use of wood molding or by the use of an edger as applicable. The concrete base
shall be finished to a true and even surface with a wood float. Concrete shall be
membrane or water cured for at least 7 days before precast units are placed thereon.
B.4 Precast concrete units shall be soaked in water immediately before installation. Units
shall be set accurately in position in mortar on the concrete base. Joints between
precast units shall not be mortared unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Units
shall be closely spaced and every 10 m run shall be provided with an expansion joint.
B.5 Where curbs or gutters are installed on existing concrete pavement using epoxy resin
adhesive, automatic devices for mixing epoxy adhesive shall be equipped so that the
separate components are delivered to the mixing head at the specified volume. The
lines feeding the mixing head shall be equipped with suitable valves that will allow
samples to be taken for checking the ratio of each component. The machine shall be
capable of metering the amount of adhesive required to secure each curb or gutter.
B.6 After curbs have been installed, steel forms shall be erected and concrete backing, if
required, shall be placed as shown on the Drawings. Pavement courses shall not be
laid against curbs until the concrete backing has membrane or water cured for at least
14 days.
B.7 The tolerances on alignment of completed precast units shall be as specified for in situ
concrete construction.
B.8 Backfilling shall be carried out as specified for in situ curbs and gutters.
C. Paving with concrete cast on site
C.1 Excavation shall be carried out to the required depth and to a width that will permit the
installation and bracing of the forms. The foundation shall be shaped and compacted
to an even surface conforming to the sections shown on the Drawings. All soft and
yielding material shall be removed and replaced with approved material.
C.2 Bedding material shall be placed in layers not exceeding 100 mm in depth and each
layer shall be compacted to 95% AASHTO T180 maximum density. The total
bedding course thickness shall be as shown on the Drawings, or if not shown, 100 mm
minimum thickness.
C.3 Forms shall be of steel, wood, or other approved material and shall extend for the full
depth of the concrete. All forms shall be straight, free from warp, and of sufficient
strength to resist the pressure of the concrete without displacement. Bracing and
staking of forms shall be such that the forms remain in both horizontal and vertical
alignment until their removal. All forms shall be cleaned and oiled before concrete is
placed.
C.4 The foundation shall be thoroughly moistened immediately prior to the placing
concrete. Concrete shall be deposited in one course in such a manner as to prevent
segregation and shall be consolidated by vibrators. The surface shall be finished with
a wooden float, then wipe lightly by broom wipe. No plastering of the surface will be
permitted. All outside edges of the concrete tiles and all joints shall be edged with a 5
mm radius edging tool.
C.5 Forms may be removed only when there is no risk of damage to the concrete and in
any case not until at least 24 hours after completion of concreting.
C.6 The smoothness of paved areas shall be tested using a 4 m straightedge. The finished
surface of concrete shall not deviate from the straightedge between any two contact

78
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

points by more than 5 mm. Sections of defective paving shall be removed and
replaced as directed, at the Contractor's expense.
C.7 Expansion joints shall be of the dimensions specified and shall be filled with
approved, pre-molded expansion joint filler. The area being paved shall be divided
into sections by weakened plane joints formed by a jointing tool or other acceptable
means as directed. These joints shall extend into the concrete 0.20 to 0.25 times the
depth and shall be approximately 3 mm wide. Joints shall match as nearly as possible
adjacent joints in curb or pavements. Weakened plane joints may be sawn in lieu of
forming with a jointing tool.
C.8 Construction joints shall be formed around all appurtenances such as valve chambers,
utility poles, etc., extending into and through the side-walk or median. Pre-molded
expansion joint filler the specified thickness shall be installed in these joints.
Expansion joint filler of the thickness indicated shall be installed between concrete
construction and any adjacent fixed structures such as buildings or bridges, etc. The
expansion joint material shall extend for the full depth of the concrete.
C.9 Concrete shall be cured by membrane curing in accordance with the requirements of
Section 3-5-2 "Concrete Handling, Placing and Curing".
D. Precast Concrete Tiles (Paving Slabs)
D.1 Excavation and the placing of bedding material shall be as specified for in situ
concrete paving. The surface of the completed bedding shall be dampened and base
course concrete shall be placed and finished to the thickness as shown on the
Drawings or if not shown, 40 mm minimum thickness.
D.2 The base course concrete shall be water or membrane cured as specified for in situ
concrete paving, for not less than 7 days before placing precast tiles.
D.3 Immediately prior to tile laying, the concrete base course shall be dampened and the
concrete tiles shall be immersed in water. Tiles shall then be laid true to line and
grade on a 10 mm to 20 mm thickness of mortar. Joints shall be 3 mm wide.
D.4 The tolerance on smoothness of precast concrete tiled areas and removal and
replacement of defective tiling, shall be as specified for in situ concrete paving.
D.5 Tiles shall be cleaned 24 to 36 hours after laying and joints shall be mortared using, if
approved, a plasticizer in the mortar to improve workability and to enable the mortar
to be readily smoothed and finished. As soon as the mortar has partially set, all mortar
material shall be raked from the top 3 mm depth of the joint, using a grooving tool to
produce a smooth circular section.
D.6 When the mortar is sufficiently set, the surface shall be sprinkled with water and
covered with plastic or nylon sheets during the curing period. The sheets shall be left
in place until final hardening of the mortar, or as directed. All foreign matter, wood,
concrete, mortar lumps, etc., shall then be removed and the surface cleaned of
staining, discoloration and other blemishes.
D.7 In cases where tiles are required to be cut at the boundaries of tiled areas, or due to the
presence of obstacles, poles, hydrants, etc., or in the construction of the driveways or
side roads, the Contractor shall cut the tiles or substitute in situ concrete of at least the
same quality as the tile concrete. The Engineer will decide, after trials, on the method
to be adopted. Cutting of tiles or substitution of in situ concrete shall be kept to a
minimum. The Contractor shall complete the areas using uncut precast tiles to the
maximum extent practicable.
D.8 The method of construction and sequence of operations, for areas constructed using
precast tiles, shall be the same as for areas constructed using in situ concrete. The

79
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Contractor shall ensure that the final appearance of such surfaces, regardless of the
method of construction, is substantially the same for both types of construction.
D.9 Where a sidewalk crosses the entrance to a shop or a house, etc., which is higher than
the sidewalk, the Contractor shall construct steps, formed by a curb and a complete or
partial tile. Steps shall be backfilled with concrete of the same quality as specified for
concrete base course.
D.10 Steps shall be constructed wherever the difference in elevation between the entrance
and the sidewalk is more than 250 mm. The Contractor shall submit for approval,
prior to commencing any sidewalk construction, a list of locations where steps will be
required, together with design details for their construction.

3-3-6 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC AND DETOURS


3-3-6-1 GENERAL
A. Scope
A.1 These Works shall consist of supplying all materials and equipment, constructing
detour roads, bridges and culverts where necessary; and installing, operating and
maintaining all required temporary lighting, signing, signals, pavement marking,
barriers and other safety measures; all for the proper maintenance of vehicular and
pedestrian traffic through and around the Site of the Works during the Contract Period.
A.2 Temporary works shall conform to the general requirements of Section 3-1-4
"Temporary Works" and as specified by the concerned Authorities (Traffic Directorate
/Municipality/Government/ Ministry of transport).
3-3-6-2 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC
A. General
A.1 The Contractor shall ensure the free movement of vehicular and pedestrian traffic and
shall maintain all highways including temporary detours and accesses in a clear and
safe condition free from obstructions. Adequate access to the Site shall be maintained
at all times to ensure that traffic on existing roads is not impeded unnecessarily by
traffic turning into the Site.
A.2 In order to facilitate movement of traffic through or around construction and when and
wherever required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain
signs, traffic barricades and other facilities necessary for safe and efficient direction
and handling of traffic at specified locations in or around the Site and as per
specification of the concerned authorities and Engineer.
A.3 The Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer, provide flashing signal lights by
night and provide sturdy barricades for the protection of workmen engaged on traffic
control.
A.4 The Contractor shall, whenever necessary, provide flagmen at specified locations with
the sole task of directing traffic through or around the Site and shall provide and erect
within or near the Site any "warning" or "directional" signs the Engineer may require.
A.5 All barriers, traffic signs, signals and other such devices shall be erected, maintained
and removed when necessary, as directed by the Engineer and concerned authorities.
A.6 Whenever it becomes necessary to operate one-way traffic along any stretch of road in
or around the Site, the Contractor shall, for the purpose of maintaining traffic, provide
a single traffic lane not less than 3.5 m wide and shall keep it open to traffic.
A.7 Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, construction of a detour is inappropriate, new

80
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

construction may be limited to half the road width at a time.


A.8 The Contractor shall submit for approval, details of the layout, pavement construction,
drainage, lighting, signing and marking of any detours that he proposes. He shall give
the Engineer at least 7 days notice of such proposals.
A.9 The standard of lighting levels and uniformity for each detour shall be at least
equivalent to that existing on the road that it replaces. In addition to lighting of
detours, the Contractor shall provide and maintain illumination of all temporary traffic
signs during the hours of darkness.
A.10 Any obstruction associated with detours, including ramps, variations of lane widths,
siting of warning signs, etc., shall be marked by the use of cones, flashing beacons and
warning lamps, appropriate to the location concerned.
A.11 Detours shall be constructed in advance of the Works which interfere with the existing
highway or access and shall be regularly maintained in a condition acceptable to the
Engineer for as long as required.
A.12 Before any detour is opened, the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer.
The diversion of traffic on the day on which the detour is initially put into operation
shall be carried out with the assistance and coordination of the Police Department.
A.13 All works under this section shall comply with the requirements of the Ministry of
Communication and traffic directorate and the concerned authorities.
A.14 The Contractor should install sufficient number of metal plates as bridges to cross the
excavations for pipelines according to the Engineer instructions and in coordination
with the citizens as per one bridge for each house. The shopping stores should be
considered. All required roads diversions should be paved. Enough coordination
should be done with the citizens to facilitate their movement during the construction
by printed notification prepared as per the requirements of the water authority in the
project area.

3-4 PIPE WORKS AND NETWORK ACCESSORIES

3-4-1 SCOPE
The works cover the supply of materials, installation, testing and commissioning of all
pipes, fittings, valves, and appurtenances.
3-4-2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3-4-2-1 GENERAL
A. SCOPE
A.1 This section outlines the sequence of construction works, aspects related to the right of
way (ROW) and the general requirements for supply and handling of equipments and
materials.
3-4-2-2 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall adhere to the sequence of construction as set out below unless a
justified request for modifying this sequence is approved by the Engineer at least two
weeks prior to commencement of work on the affected section of the network:
 Stake out pipe alignments.
 Clear and grade the right of way.
 Conduct field surveys.

81
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

 Carry out exploratory trenching across existing roads to verify location, depth,
size and type of existing utilities.
 Prepare and submit to Supervision Engineer for approval composite Shop
Drawings for all utilities showing alignment, ground elevation, trench invert
elevation, pipe size, class and length, station and size of fittings, valves as
applicable chambers, inlets, appurtenances and structures to be demolished and
reinstated (curbstone, rails, culverts, etc.). Cross sections showing location and
inverts of existing pipes and those proposed shall be prepared. Pipes, structures
and other utilities to be removed or relocated shall be indicated on the Shop
Drawings. The Contract Drawings shall be modified wherever required to
produce the Shop Drawings.
 Relocate, demolish and reinstate existing utilities interfering with pipeline
alignments.
 Remove pavement layers, excavate trenches, place bedding all as required.
 Lay and join pipes, fittings, appurtenances, valve chambers, etc…
 Place primary backfill material.
 Perform required air, hydraulic or other required testing.
 Install required house connections and or connections to existing utilities as
required.
 Place final backfill.
 Restore or reinstate surfaces and structures as required.
 Carry out final surface works road surfacing curb stone, backing walls, side
walk tiling, etc…
 Dispose of surplus materials.
3-4-2-3 RIGHT OF WAY (ROW)
A. Extent
A.1 All utilities services shall be installed in the right-of-way of existing or proposed roads
as shown on the Drawings and as per concerned authorities’ directions.
B. Clearing and Grading
B.1 The ROW shall be used for both access to works sites and for service roads for the
pipelines.
B.2 In case the pipelines run outside existing roads, the ROW shall be cleared and graded
to the required slopes; road cross-sections and all drains shall be as indicated on the
Drawings.
B.3 Road surfacing / resurfacing works shall commence only after completion of pipe
installation and construction of all required works.
3-4-2-4 MATERIALS, PRODUCTS SUPPLY AND HANDLING
A. Structural Materials
A.1 Concrete shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 3-5-1 "Concrete and
Concrete Mixes and Testing".
A.2 Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 3-5-3 "Steel
Reinforcement and Fixing".
B. Products supply requirements
B.1 Manufacturer's certificate: Materials shall be supplied with a certificate for each

82
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

delivery. The certificate shall clearly state that products comply with the specified
Standards and have been factory tested accordingly.
B.2 Marking: Unless otherwise specified in the relevant Standard products shall have
legibly cast, stamped or indelibly painted on, the following marks, as appropriate:
 Manufacturer's name, initials and identification mark.
 Nominal diameter.
 Class designation.
 Initials and number of relevant Standard.
 Length of pipe if shorter than standard length.
 Angle of bends in degrees.
 Date of manufacture.
B.3 Special tests: Whenever required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply and
transport samples of materials selected by the Engineer to a testing laboratory. The
number of samples shall not exceed 0.5% of total supplied. However, at least one
sample from each class, diameter and manufacturer shall be tested. Failure of any
sample shall be followed by a second and if necessary a third test from the same batch
regardless of whether the limits on number of tests has been exceeded or not. A third
test failure shall result in all material from that manufacturer being rejected and
replaced by material from a different manufacturer, subject to approval and
satisfactory tests. Laboratory test report in an approved form must be provided.
C. Products handling
C.1 General
C.1.1 Manufacturer's recommendations on handling, repairing, laying, jointing, anchoring,
testing and other works for pipes and fittings shall be strictly followed.
C.1.2 For loading and unloading, the Contractor shall use cranes, hoists or skidways as
directed by the Engineer. Use of hooks, spreader beams, ropes, band or wire slings etc.
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of each type of pipe and as approved by
the Engineer.
C.1.3 Pipes shall be stacked on horizontal surfaces. Pipes shall not be stored on their sockets
or jointing fairlings. End pipes in bottom row shall be secured by chocks. The
allowable height of stacks shall be to the manufacturer's instructions.
C.1.4 Material and equipment shall be handled with care whenever moved by hand, skid
ways or hoists and any damage incurred shall result in the material being rejected.
C.1.5 The Contractor shall provide safe storage for the material. The interior of pipes,
fittings etc. shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter. Shade for materials shall be
provided as required by manufacturer's instructions and to the Engineer's approval.
C.1.6 Cutting hacksaws, manually operated wheel cutters or pipe cutting machines shall be
used as per manufacturer's instructions. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, special
precautions are to be taken to eliminate airborne particles, methods and equipment
shall be used as directed by the Engineer. Ends shall be prepared according to type of
joint used and as per manufacturer's recommendations. Care shall be taken to avoid
any damage to the lining. Minor damage may be repaired on site as directed by the
Engineer.
C.1.7 The Contractor shall repair damaged coating, sheathing or lining in accordance with
the Specification and manufacturer's instructions. Material used for repair work shall
be compatible with that originally used. All repair works shall be approved by the

83
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Engineer before incorporating materials into the work.


C.1.8 Bricks and cast iron frames and covers of valve chambers and all other construction
materials shall be loaded and unloaded by fitting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid
shock or damage. No hooks shall be used inside pipe. Under no circumstances shall
such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skid ways shall not be skidded or rolled
against the other pipe or other materials already on the ground.
C.1.9 All materials shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. In
distributing the material at the site of the work, each pipe shall be unloaded opposite
or at the nearest possible place where it is to be laid in the trench.
C.1.10 A space of suitable width, clear of any spoil materials shall be left all along the trench
so that no pipes shall be placed on excavated material.
C.2 HDPE Pipes and Fittings
Manufacturer’s instructions shall be strictly adhered to while handling pipes and
fittings. Extreme care shall be taken when handling pipes and fittings.
The pipes shall be loaded using enough supports to avoid any sort of bending,
distortion, damage, scratches to the barrel or ends or any part of pipes and fittings.
When off loading, pipes shall be lowered taking all precautions to avoid bending,
distortion, damage, scratches and never be dropped to the ground. Pipes shall be given
adequate and enough supports while stacking. Pipes shall never be stacked in large
piles or under direct sun light to avoid ultraviolet degradation and manufacturer’s
instructions shall be strictly adhered to. Any pipe with ends prepared for jointing shall
be stacked in layers with sockets placed at alternate ends of the stack and with the
sockets protruding to avoid unstable stacks.
For long term storage, pipes shall be stored in pipe racks providing continuous support
under a shed with insulated roof and shall never be kept under sunlight to avoid
ultraviolet degradation.
Also while loading pipes and fittings, care must be taken to avoid their coming into
contact with any sharp corners such a angle irons, sharp steel sheets, loose nail-heads.
While in transit, pipes shall be well secured over their entire length. While off-loading,
care shall be taken that pipes and fittings do not fall one upon another or to any hard or
uneven surfaces. Pipes and fittings shall be transported to the site in special pile rack
type containerized units to facilitate loading, unloading, onsite storage, retrieval and
protection of pipes and fittings from sunlight and ultraviolet radiations.
C.3 Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings
All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be handled and stored strictly according to the
instructions of manufacturer.
Pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants, cast iron frames and covers and all other construction
materials shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid
shock or damage. No hooks shall be used inside the pipe. Under no circumstances
shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or
rolled against pipe or other materials already on the ground.
In distributing the material at the site of the work, each pipe shall be unloaded
opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
Pipe shall be so handled that coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at
his expense according to manufacturer’s specifications or in a manner satisfactory to
the Engineer, or be replaced as determined by the Engineer.

84
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

C.4 Paste lubricating


The past lubricating is used to reduce the power needed for compression in the case of
the installation and linked joints to the inside with the use of rubber rings (sealing).
Painting paste lubricant on the face exposed and the exhibition of the rubber ring when
placed in its base at the top of the tube under the rubber ring in addition to paint the
outer surface to the marked salient to connect the tube on the tail of the other
the quality of the lubricating paste is selected to fulfill the following
-Easy to be used in site.
- Good performance in the water.
- Use on a wide range of temperatures. (-20 ˚ C to 60 ˚ C).
- Does not affect the physicochemical and the organic portable properties of water.
- Inhibits the growth of bacteria.
- Good stability in storage.
C.5 Rubber Ring Gaskets
All gaskets for vitrified clay (VC), unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC), Glass
fibre reinforced concrete (RC) pipes and fittings shall be handled and stored strictly
according to their respective manufacturer’s instructions.
For storage of gaskets, the storage temperature is to be between + 5˚C and + 25˚C. If
stored at low temperatures and taken out for immediate use, their temperature must be
brought to approximately 30˚C prior to their use. The gaskets are to be protected from
direct sunlight and a strong artificial light with ultraviolet content. The gaskets must
be protected from the surrounding air either by wrapping them up or storing them in
hermetically sealed boxes.
D. Materials and Equipment Furnished by the Contractor
D.1 The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment that will be incorporated in
the works and all other materials and equipment needed during construction. He shall
also furnish such constructional plant and equipment as in the opinion of the Engineer,
is necessary and adequate to perform all work within the scheduled time for
completion.
D.2 The bidder shall state in the schedule provided in the trade name of materials and
equipment he intends to incorporate in the works as well as the name of the
manufacturer and his full address. The Contractor shall be bound to use the same
manufacturer materials and equipment quoted in his Tender.
D.3 The Contractor shall, submit to the Engineer in triplicate certified copies of the un
priced agreements with the manufacturers of the materials and equipment to be used in
the works. Such agreements shall embody all the appropriate specification clauses
including testing and inspection and shall state delivery periods.
D.4 Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be brand new and of the
type and quality described in the specification. The Contractor shall procure all
materials and equipment, whether specified or substituted, from eligible sources.
Where, because of Employer’s priorities or other causes, materials or equipment
required by the specification become unavailable, substituted materials or equipment
may be used.
D.5 The Engineer’s decision as to whether substitution shall be permitted and as to what
substitute materials.

85
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

E. Inspection of Materials and Equipment


E.1 Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor which will become a part of the
permanent works shall be subject to inspection at any one or more of the following
locations as determined by the Engineer: at the place of production or manufacture, at
the hipping point, or at the site.
E.2 The allow sufficient time to provide for inspection, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer, at the time of issuance, copies in triplicate of purchase orders, including
drawings and other pertinent information, covering materials and equipment on which
inspection will be made as advised by the Engineer, or shall submit other evidence in
the event such purchase orders are issued verbally or by letter. The inspection of
materials and equipment or the waiving of the inspection thereof shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing materials and equipment
meeting the requirements of the specification.
F. Rejected Materials
Should any materials, equipment or manufactured articles prove to be, in the judgment
of the Engineer or as a result of testing, unsound or of inferior quality or in any way
unsuitable for the works in which it is proposed to employ them, such materials,
equipment or manufactured articles shall not be used in the works but shall be
branded, if in the opinion of the Engineer this is necessary, and shall forthwith be
removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor’s expense and in each case as the
Engineer shall direct.
G. Approved Manufacturer’s Instructions
G.1 The Contractor shall supply the equipment, materials or other items from the approved
manufacturers listed or equal and approved.
G.2 All equipment or materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturers’ original
unopened containers with the manufacturers’ brand and name clearly marked on.
G.3 All equipment or materials shall be assembled mixed, fixed, applied installed or
otherwise incorporated in the works in accordance with the printed instructions of the
manufacturer of the equipment or materials and/or the relevant standards as specified.
H. Certification and Third Party Inspection
All material provided by Contractor shall be procured from ISO/BS certified
manufacturers. The certificate should cover all the processes associated with the
production of the manufactured item and should be submitted to the Engineer approval
with the material submittals by the Contractor. Upon the request of the Engineer, the
Contractor shall propose an internationally accredited and reputable audit firm to act
as a third party inspector who shall certify that all material manufactured and shipped
for the project have been manufactured and conforms to the specified international
standard governing the manufacture of the finished item / product as specified in the
project Tender Documents. The scope of the third party inspection shall cover at least
the quality control tests listed in the forth coming sections of the Specification. The
cost of the third party inspection shall be borne by the Contractor.

3-4-3 PIPES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES


3-4-3-1 MATERIALS
The used of pipe type for drinking water supply network will be as described in the

86
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

following table unless otherwise specified:


Type of pipes / Materials Recommendations of use
For small diameters to 160 mm - the
High density polyethylene - HDPE
category of pressure up to 10 bar.
Ductile Iron – DI For diameters greater than or equal to 200
Lined with cement (Class K9) mm diameter - 16 bar.
Connect to the work
Steel
of the steel tank pressure 10 bar.
uPVC to detect the leak under the steel tank

Perforated uPVC to collect the leaked water under the steel


tank

The following paragraph describes the specifications of each of these pipes:


A. Ductile iron pipe
A.1 Use DI pipes Class K9 for water supply network for diameters greater than or equal
200 mm and operating pressure up to 16 bars.
A.2 Ductile iron pipe for water shall be to BS EN 545 or equivalent. Unless otherwise
indicated in the Bill of Quantities or the Drawings, Class K9 shall be used for all pipe
diameters and in the case where pressure does not exceed 16 bars for large diameters.
A.3 Ductile iron fittings shall be to IS02531 or BS EN545 [1] or equivalent with socket/
spigot ends. Joint deflection at installation shall not exceed 50% of the maximum
allowed by manufacturer.
A.4 Spigot and socket ended pipes shall be used for straight runs and adjacent to elbows or
fittings. These joints shall be provided with rubber gaskets, and an external
thrust block is required at elbows or fittings. Anchored or self restrained joints shall be
used for sections adjacent to elbows in areas where space is restricted or indicated on
the Drawings or Bill of Quantities. Anchored joints are to be push-in, self anchored
type able to take up the axial forces thus allowing concrete thrust blocks to be
dispensed with. The Contractor shall submit calculations verifying the number of
restrained joints required noting that pipe pressure testing will be made when pipes are
partially backfilled and joints are exposed.
A.5 Rubber gasket shall be to BS/EN545 or ISO 4633 or equivalent.
A.6 Flanged pipes wherever specified shall have screwed-on or cast-on flanges to sustain
working pressure of - PN 16 minimum.
A.7 Flanges shall conform to ISO 2531 or BS 4504 [2] or equivalent.
A.8 Factory protection for pipes:
 Pipes shall be internally cement lined to confirm with ISO4179 or BS EN 545
[1] or equivalent and according to specified thicknesses.
Lining thickness
Diameter (mm) Minimum average Minimum value at
Normal (mm)
value (mm) Point (mm)
Up to 300 mm ٣ ٢.٥ ١.٥
From 350mm to 600mm ٥ ٤.٥ ٢.٥

87
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

From 700mm to 1200mm ٦ ٥.٥ ٣


From 1400mm to 1800mm ٩ ٨ ٤
 Externally, pipe shall be coated with metallic zinc to conform with BS EN 545
[1] or ISO 8179 or equivalent and followed by a bitumen coat to BS 3416 [4]
or ISO8179 or equivalent.
A.9 Additional Site Protection for Ductile Iron Pipes
A.9.1 Polyurethane Coating
 The coating shall be 100% solid polyurethane consists of two components: one
isocyanides-rich solution and one oplyol-rich solution.
 The coating shall be completely continuous and free from all holidays, voids, pinholes
or other defects.
 The test certificate shall state the property of the coating and shall specify the test
method used.
 The polyurethane coating system shall comply with the data included in the following
Tables:

Technical Data of Polyurethane External Coating


Material Polyurethane, 2 Components airless applicator
Color Black
Density 1.6g/mm3
Tensile Strength 25N/ mm3
Adhesion to Steel > 8Mpa (Stee grit blasted SA21/2)
Dielectric Strength 200 Kv/cm
Water Absorption 3.5% at 25C
Impact Resistance > 15Nm
Temperature Resistance 90C continuous
Salt Water Spray No effect after 1000hrs
Elongation > 10%
Chemical Resistance Water solution of salts, acids, and bases of pH 1-14
Thickness 1-1.5mm
A.9.2 Polyethylene Sleeves
- Protective polyethylene sleeves shall be used with all DI pipes and fittings to
be installed in buried condition and shall be in accordance with ISO 8180.
- The minimum nominal thickness of the sleeve shall be 0.010 inch (250
microns) with a maximum minus tolerance of 10%.
- The material shall be made from a polymer with a melt flow index as measured
according to BS 2782, of 10 or less and a density in the range of 0.915 to
925g/ml. The sleeve shall be free from pinholes, gels, undispresed raw
materials and particles of foreign matter. The film may not contain more than
5% by weight of material other than polyethylene.

88
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

- Polyethylene sleeving shall be stored in cool dry store away from direct
sunlight or excessive heat, the length of the roll, the pipe size for which it is
intended.
A.9.3 Repair of Coating and Lining
- In case of repairs are needed the Contractor shall take immediate action to
correct the situation.
- All the repairs to the coated or lined pipe and fitting shall be at the Contractor
own expense.
- The Contractor shall submit the repair procedure to the Employer for approval.
- The procedure for the repair shall be as directed by the Engineer and the
manufacture specification.
A.9.4 Anti Corrosion Pipe Wrapping Tape
 The tape shall be supplied 150 mm or 225 mm wide in 15 m or 25 m rolls, or
approved by Engineer depending upon the requirements.
 Pipe diameters up to 200mm, 150mm width tape shall be used.
 Pipe diameters above 200mm, 225mm width tape shall be used.
 The adhesive compound shall be of the pressure sensitive type (that is, not
requiring a primer in order to achieve bond to the substrata) and shall have
thickness between 0.75 to 0.90 mm. Flow coefficient of bitumen viscosity at
200˚C and 175˚C shall be 5.5 poise and 7.5 poise respectively.
 The tape shall be supplied with a wider high quality silicon release paper
covering complete tape. Both sides of the tape shall have a minimum of 5mm
wider silicon release paper to prevent edge contamination.
 During storage at maximum storage temperature of 500 C for six months, the
adhesive material shall not flow out of the release paper and there shall not be
any end blocking.
 Wrapping tape shall be marked with the following information:
 Manufacturers name & logo
 Date of manufacture
 Width of the tape
 Batch number
A.9.5 Wrapping Procedure
To increase the wrapping protection efficiency, pipe diameters up to 300mm must be
wrapped using semi-automatic tape wrapping machine and for pipe diameters above
300mm, fully automatic wrapping machine should be used.
A.9.6 Storage
Wrapping tape should be stored in dry, cool, well ventilated condition, out of direct
sunlight.
A.9.7 Packing
Roll shall be placed in a cardboard carton in layers in vertical position. A proper

89
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

separator for safe storage shall separate each layer. The boxes shall be marked at two
places given name and logo of manufacturer, tender no., type, size and quantity of
material in black/blue color letters with a minimum height of 50mm.
The wrapping tape shall also conform to the following specifications given below;

S. No. Property Test Method Unit Data


1 Color - - -
1.1 Backing - - Blue RAL
5000/5001/
5005/5010/2017
1.2 Adhesive Compound - - Black
1.3 Release Paper - - White / Cream
3 Backing Thickness Min. - mm 0.75
4 Total Thickness Min. - mm 1.5
5 Elongation BS 2782 % 270
6 Tensile Strength Tape BS 2782 N/mm2 14.8
7 Modules BS2782 N/mm2 50
8 Tear Strength ASTM D1004 N 50
9 Impact Resistance (Two Layers) DIN 30627 Nm 15

Viscosity at 200˚C Cone & Plate Poise 5.5


Viscosity at 175˚C Cone & Plate Poise 7.5
11 Adhesion to Steel ASTM D 1000 N/mm 2.75
12 Adhesion to Tape ASTM D 1000 N/mm 2.75
Electrical
13 Dielectric Strength BS 2782 kV 30
14 Insulation Resistance ASTM D 257 Ohm/cm2 1012
15 Cathodic Disbondment ASTM G 8 mm2 NIL
16 Water Vapor permeability BS 2782 g/m2/24h 0.4
17 Water Absorption ASTM D 570 % 0.1
18 Bacterial Growth Disbondment - - NIL
Temperature
19 For Wrapping - ˚C 0 to + 50
20 In Service - ˚C 0 to + 50
21 For Storage - ˚C Up to + 50

90
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

A.10 Factory protection for fittings


Fittings shall be coated internally and externally according to EN 545 Clause 4-5
using epoxy based material, minimum epoxy content 70% and thickness 10 mm at
least and coating the inner layer of the fittings using epoxy
Installer fusion FBE non toxic.
A.11 Testing on Ductile Iron Pipes
The following tests shall be carried out on samples from every batch of DI pipes
delivered to site. A report of the third party inspector shall cover at least these tests all
as approved by the Engineer. All tests shall be carried out according to BS/EN545 or
ISO 2531 or equivalent:
 Visual inspection
 Microscopic structure
 Tensile strength
 Elongation
 Brinell hardness
 Lining thickness
 Composition and thickness of external coating
 Ring bending and detachment of lining for pipes > 500 mm diameter
 Hydrostatic test
B. Polyethylene HDPE Pipe
B.1 Use HDPE pipes PN10 for small distribution pipe diameters up to 160 mm.
Pipes and fittings shall be to SASO 1401, ISO 4427, DIN 8074/8075 or AWWA
C906-99. Pipe 60m shall be supplied in straight pieces and not rolled on a drum. The
ends of each pipe shall be plain and suitable for heat fusion. Pipe and fittings shall be
class 10 kg/cm2.
B.2 Materials used shall have a standard PE code designation 3408 and a minimum
hydrostatic design basis of 1600 psi (or 180 kg/cm2) according to AWWA C906 Table
1.
B.3 Manufacturers shall provide certification that stress regression testing has been
performed on the pipe products. Materials shall also meet elevated temperature
requirements as given in Table 2 AWWA C906.
B.4 Fittings shall be to AWWA C906, extruded or injection moulded suitable for class of
pipe required.
B.5 Joints for pipes and fittings shall be by butt fusion or by socket fusions and in strict
accordance with pipe manufactures recommendations. Joints shall have a tensile
strength equal to that of the pipe. Fusion temperature, interface pressure, alignment
and cooling time, shall be according to manufactures recommendations.
B.6 Tests on PE compounds: Where PE is used for potable water, PE compounds in pipes
and fittings shall contain no ingredients in an amount that has been demonstrated to
migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. PE compounds shall be tested
and certified suitable for potable water by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
Testing Laboratory – USA, or the Canadian Standard Association (CSA) Testing
Laboratory, or other accredited testing agency. Tests shall be made in accordance with
requirements no less restrictive than those in the NSF Standard No. 14 (1976),

91
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Sections 3 and 4. The seal and mark of the testing laboratory shall be included on
pipes and fittings.
B.7 Tests on HDPE Pipes
The following tests shall be carried out on samples from every batch of pipes
delivered to site by the third party inspection. The test report of the third party
inspector shall cover at least the following tests all as specified and indicated by
SASO ISO or DIN standards.
 Visual inspection
 Wall thickness
 Out of roundness
 Hydrostatic strength at 20˚ and 80˚ C
 Longitudinal reversion / shrinkage test
 Tensile properties
 Visual inspection
 Thermal stability – oxidation induction time
 Environmental stress crack resistance
 Density
C. Steel Pipe
C.1 steel pipe are used in tank's connections as shown on drawings.
C.2 Steel pipe size 150 mm (6") and smaller shall be welded black steel, seamless or
welded, and shall conform to BS 1387 [15] medium class, ISO 65 or DIN 2440.
C.3 Steel pipe size 200 mm (8") and larger shall be welded black steel, and shall conform
to AWWA C200, grade A, or equivalent. Wall thickness shall conform to AWWA
C200-97 Section 3-4. Minimum wall thickness shall be to BS 3600 [16] or as given in
the Bill of Quantities.
C.4 Steel pipe shall be round and straight and shall be free from injurious defects. Defects
shall be considered injurious when the depth of defect is greater than 12.5% of the
tabulated wall thickness. Pipe shall be free from rust.
C.5 Fittings normally made from manufactured and tested pipes or fabricated by welding
to AWWA C208. Material is to be same nominal pressure
C.6 Steel pipes shall be joined by welding. All welding including surface preparation
methods, welding procedures and qualification of welders and welding operators shall
be performed in conformance with AWWA C206 1997.
C.7 All steel pipes and specials shall be lined internally to the thickness specified with
concrete made from ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 [3] and fine aggregate.
The materials used for lining, the method of lining and curing of the finished lining
and the manufacture and testing of test cubes shall comply with BS 534 [17] and shall
be carried out to the approval of the Engineer.
C.8 Steel pipes, fittings and specials shall be protected externally with bituminous
laminate tape 1.6 mm thick and with 55% overlap or as recommended by the
manufacturer.
C.9 Testing on Steel Pipes
The following tests shall be carried out on steel pipes delivered to site. The test report
of the third party inspection shall cover at least the following tests all as specified by
International Standards.

92
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

 Visual inspection
 Pipe wall thickness
 Weld seems
 Tensile strength
 Hydrostatic testing
 Lining thickness
 Composition and thickness of external coating
D. UPVC pipes:
D.1 Use upvc pipes according to German Standard (DIN8061) using in water supply
network for diameters smaller than 200 mm, with operating pressure up to 10 bars.
upvc pipes , fittings shall be according to (ISO3633, ISO4435, DIN8061, DIN8062,
DIN8063, DIN8661, DIN9532 B.S3505), the standard length of each straight segment
must be about 6 m, the edges of the pipe must be smooth (internal and external),
without any cracks effect on its efficiency , the change in the length after thermal test
(according to German Standard DIN 8661) must be less than 5 % and the change in
the distance between any two point on the pipe surface must be less than 2.5 %
D.2 Upvc pipes must be manufacture accordance to German Standard DIN9532.
D.3 In sulfuric acid test, the sample weight ranges between 0.013-0.32 gm/cm2
D.4 The test of toxic effect of upvc pipes on water must be according specifications British
standard 3505; (lead percent must be less than 1 mg / liter after first reclamation, less
than 0.2 mg /l. after the third reclamation.
D.5 Acetone resistance test must be according to British standard (B.S3505)
D.6 The impact force must be according to German Standard DIN8061, the number of
broken specimens is less than 10%.
D.7 The absorption value of upvc pipes must be less than 4 mg / cm2.
D.8 The dimensions and clearances of upvc pipes must be according to German Standard
DIN8062.
D.9 Upvc connections and fittings should be according to German Standard DIN8063.
D.10 That has high mechanical properties so that the tensile strength no less than about 3.5
Kgf/mm2 and modulus of elasticity of 197 Kgf/mm2 and impact resistance for 3.55
Kgf / cm and the temperature deviation under load at a temperature of 55 C 0.1856
Kgf/mm2.
D.11 Test on the pipes uPVC.
 The following tests are conducted on samples from each production mix Upvc
pipes that are delivered at the site. The test report of the observers team will
cover at least the third, all as shown as The standards of Saudi Arabia and the
international targets:
 Visual inspection
 Thickness of the walls
 Out for circumscribed.

93
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

 Tensile strength
 Longitudinal / deflation test
 Lining thickness
 Stability, thermal-oxidative induction time
 Resistance to environmental stress cracking under
 Hydrostatic testing.
 Specific gravity should be not less than Kg/m3 1380and not more
than Kg/m3 1425.
 Opacity and Should be not send more than 0.2% ofvisible light falling
on it.
 The linear expansion coefficient must be 1 mm change in the
length change at 22 ° C and allowed 5 degrees Celsius in the high or
low for each 1 meter length of pipe when operating at a
temperature above the ocean.
 The composition and thickness of outer coating.
E. Perforated Pipes UPVC
E.1 Should be a perforated pipes uPVC in accordance with British Standards
BS 4600 or 5481.
E.2 Circular perforation should be between 10 mm and 6 mm in diameter
and the rectangular perforation between 3 mm to 4 mm in width They should be
a holes smaller than the gravel of soil runway Ocean of pipe should also have the
efficiency to collect water leaking from the tank in the event of a leak.
E.3 is done all the tests on the pipes perforated uPVC pipe such as uPVC pipe
normal except for hydrostatic test.
3-4-3-2 ACCESSORIES
A) Tape warning: warning network must be a width of 400 mm above the main and
branched water pipes and plyage HR 40D blue polyethene and be on the same axis of the
pipe and connecting with valves and be at a depth of 350 mm below the final ground
level .
Network alarm should be placed above the plastic pipes polypropylene reinforcing band
of stainless steel tracer wire in width 200 mm at a depth of 350 mm below the final
ground level.
B) Signal panel: Panel should note that describes the locations of valves, fire hydrants
and the transmission line and shall comply with the specifications of BS 3251. And
must be placed in the back of the sidewalk, on the wall of the main road to the nearest
valve, fire hydrants or the transmission line.

Panel should refer to the fire hydrants to be of black letters in accordance with the
specifications of BS 3251 and if it is colored, it should be in yellow canary, in accordance
with reference n. 309 in BS 381C, and must be written on the board pipe diameter and the
distance between the mark and the valve or fire hydrants or the transmission line is placed

94
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

every 100 m and at the elbows and valves.


The column is of concrete construction and be the type of concrete 20N/40mm.
3-4-3-3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Bedding
A.1 Pipe bedding material shall be as specified before in section 3-2-4-5.
B. Pipe Laying and Jointing - Generally
B.1 The pipe shall be brought to grade and approved prior to the lowering of the pipe into
the trench. Pipes shall be laid to slopes shown on drawings.
B.2 Lowering of pipes into the trench shall be carried carefully in a manner that does not
cause damages to the pipes or trench itself. Lowering pipes shall be carried out using
ropes, wire slings, band slings, spreader beams etc. as recommended by manufacturer
for each type of pipe and as approved.
B.3 All material shall be carefully examined for damage and tested in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions before laying to the satisfaction of Engineer.
B.4 The Contractor shall examine material to ensure internal coating or lining and outer
coating or sheathing are undamaged. If damaged, make good or dispose of as directed.
B.5 Pipe Cleanliness: The Contractor shall remove dirt and other materials before
lowering, and shall clear construction debris from inside of pipe before making joint.
B.6 Pipe Placement: The Contractor shall lay pipes on even formations true to grade and
line, with sockets (if any) facing up the gradient.
B.7 Pipe on Solid Ground: The Contractor shall cut holes in bottom of trench to allow
proper jointing and for barrel of pipe to bear evenly on the bedding for its full length.
B.8 Pipe on Granular Bedding: The Contractor shall scoop out locally at sockets/couplings
to enable pipe to rest uniformly on barrel and adjust to exact line and level. After
testing the Contractor shall lay and compact further granular material in 150 mm
layers or as approved to levels shown on the Drawings.
B.9 Pipe on Concrete Bed or Surround: The Contractor shall provide rectangular blocks of
concrete Class 210/25, made in approved moulds at least 14 days before use, and
hardwood folding wedges approved by the Engineer and also provide two concrete
blocks for each pipe, set and bone into correct level on formation bottom and lay pipe
properly centred and socketed. The Contractor shall insert two hardwood folding
wedges of width equal to width of concrete block between body of pipe and block and
drive together until pipe is brought to exact level required and leave blocks and
wedges undisturbed while pipes are being jointed and concrete bed and haunch or
surround are being placed. The Contractor shall ensure blocks and wedges are of
sufficient size and strength to prevent settlement of pipe and leave sufficient space to
enable joints to be made, tested and inspected.
B.10 Pipe Plugs: When pipe work is not in progress, the Contractor shall close open ends of
pipes with properly fitted temporary wooden plugs or standard caps as directed.
B.11 Pipe minimum cover shall be 1.0 m unless specified by drawings or Engineer
directions.
C. Jointing
C.1 Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed regarding placement of bedding and
backfilling, cleanliness of joint surfaces, lubricant used, correct location of
components, provision of correct gaps between end of spigot and back of socket for
flexible joints etc.

95
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

C.2 Deflection of Joint: The Contractor shall not deflect flexible joints beyond 50 percent
maximum permissible angles given by manufacturer and/or relevant Standard.
C.3 Patent Detachable and Flexible Joints: The Contractor shall strictly comply with
special instructions issued by manufacturers of proprietary joints when laying and
jointing.
C.4 Differing Pipe and Fitting Material: The Contractor shall joint with adaptors as
recommended by pipe manufacturer.
D. Line and Gradient
D.1 in Open Excavation: The Contractor shall provide and maintain sight rails and boning
rods properly painted to ensure correct alignment of pipe runs. Sight rails shall be
positioned either vertically above the lines of pipes or immediately adjacent thereto.
At no time are there to be less than three sight rails in position on each length of
pipeline under construction to any one gradient.
D.2 Wherever possible and as per the Engineer instructions the Contractor should use the
suitable recent surveying devices to adjust the line and gradient of pipelines.
D.3 In heading the Contractor shall provide and maintain marks to establish line and level
of pipeline. Marks shall be fixed in each working shaft and two further marks
established in each length of heading.
E. Floatation
E.1 Prevention: Whenever water is excluded from interior of pipe the Contractor shall
place sufficient backfill above pipe to prevent floatation.
E.2 Removal of Pipe: The Contractor shall correct bedding and relay any pipe that has
floated.
F. Pipe Built into Structures
F.1 Treatment of External Surface: The Contractor shall thoroughly clean outside surface
of pipes to be built-in immediately before installation and remove protective coating to
metal pipes, where ordered. The Contractor shall roughen clay and concrete pipes as
directed and paint plastic pipes with appropriate solvent cement and sprinkle with dry
coarse sand whilst wet. The Contractor shall cut away sheathing from sections to be
built-in and after installation restore protection up to external face of structure with
approved bituminous material.
F.2 Flexible Joints: The Contractor shall install two flexible joints or flexible patented
joints adjacent to structures and place the first joint not more than one pipe diameter
from face of structure and second not more than the following distances away from
first:
 Pipelines Not Exceeding 450 mm: 2 pipe diameters
 Pipelines Over 450 mm and Not Exceeding 1000 mm: 1.2 m
 Pipelines Over 1000 mm: 1.8 m.
In general, the length of the short pieces may be selected as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
3-4-3-4 PIPE WORK TESTING
A. Field Testing: Generally
A.1 Provision of Test Equipment: All items for test have to be provided on site before the
test i.e pressure gauges, instruments, water etc...
A.2 The Contractor shall carry out tests in the presence of the Engineer.

96
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

A.3 Fittings and Joints: The Contractor shall permanently anchor fittings before testing
and leave all joints exposed for checking.
A.4 Test Sections: The Contractor shall limit test sections to not more than 500 m.
A.5 Test Sections: The Contractor shall test pressure lines between valve chambers
whenever possible.
A.6 Test Sections: No testing shall be carried out against or through the pressure reducing
valves. The setting of the pressure reducing valves shall not be changed for testing
purposes.
A.7 Test Plug: The Contractor shall secure end of main and test plug by struts.
A.8 Closed Valve: The Contractor shall not test against a closed valve unless there is no
acceptable alternative.
A.9 The Contractor shall apply pressure by manually operated test pump or, in the case of
large diameter mains, by power driven test pump, if approved.
A.10 The Contractor shall examine exposed joints and repair visible leaks.
A.11 Failure: Should a test fail, the Contractor shall locate the leak and replace or make
good defective pipe or replace and make good faulty joint. The Contractor shall retest
main.
A. 12 Records: The Contractor shall keep test records in an approved form and hand original
copy to the Engineer immediately after completion of test.
A.13 Pressure Lines: The Contractor shall carry out hydrostatic test while pipeline is
partially backfilled.
B. Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
B.1 The pipeline shall be filled slowly with water from the lowest point. After filling with
water, absorbent pipes shall be allowed to stand for at least 24 hours before testing to
allow for complete absorption.
B.2 Entrapped air shall be bled and pressurising shall then proceed until the specified test
pressure is reached in the lowest part of the pipeline section under test. Further
quantities of entrapped air shall be bled while the pressure is being raised.
B.3 Hydrostatic testing Pressure shall conform to (AWWA C500) specifications, and the
testing pressure should be equal to 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure for the
pipeline as per the Site Engineer directions without exceeding 75% of manufacture
hydrostatic pressure.
B.4 The test pressure shall be maintained for one hour by pumping using a separate test
pump. Pumping shall then be stopped for 2 hours, at the end of which time the line
shall be re-pressurized to the original test pressure and the volume of water pumped
into the line recorded.
B.5 The pipeline shall be deemed to have failed the test if visible leaks are detected
(regardless of leakage being within the allowable specified limit) or if the volume of
water pumped to restore original test pressure after the period when pumping was
stopped exceeds or 0.1 litre/day per km of pipe per mm of pipe diameter for each 3 kg/
cm2 of applied pressure for other pipe material.
C. Visual Inspection Test
C.1 Timing: The Contractor shall carry out test after total backfilling of length under test.
C.2 Limit of length to be tested at one time is three full- length pipes unless otherwise
approved.
C.3 Apparatus: The Contractor shall use rubber tyred bogies that do not damage lining of

97
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

pipe and an adequate supply of electric lamps.


C.4 The Contractor shall check joints by means of feelers to ensure rubber rings are
correctly located.
C.5 The Contractor shall check pipe barrel for visible cracks.
D. Testing of Water Retaining Structures
D.1 All water retaining structures such as reservoirs, tanks, basins ponds, regardless of the
construction material, lining or final surface treatment shall be tested or Water-
tightness.
D.2 Tightness testing shall be carried out according to ACI 350.1-01/350.1R-01.
D.3 Allowable losses of water, after correction for evaporation, precipitation etc. shall be
as set in the table below:

Type of structure Test and Criteria*


Tanks/Reservoirs/Channels/Conduits for HST-VIO & HST-NML
water or wastewater, Concrete or metal,
Open or covered (Storm water Channels
not included)
Pressurized Tanks SHT-VIO & SHT-NML
PNT-VIO & PNT-NML
CPT-VIO & CPT-NML
As applicable or as directed
by the Engineer
D.4 Notwithstanding satisfactory completion of the water absorption test, any leakage
visible on the outside faces of the structure shall be stopped. Any caulking or making
good of cracks in the wall section shall, where practicable, be carried out from the
inside face, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
D.5 Upon completion of the test, the Contractor shall empty the structure, dispose of the
contents and shall clean the structure and any equipment therein of all deposits left by
the water.
E. Flushing and Disinfection of Water Mains
E.1 Procedure: To AWWA C651-92.
E.2 The Contractor shall provide equipment, gauges, temporary connections and chlorine
needed for flushing and disinfection and arrange with the Employer to draw water
from existing sources.
E.3 Sections: The Contractor shall flush and disinfect mains in sections as directed by the
Engineer.
E.4 Draining: The Contractor shall use washout valves and fire hydrants to drain flushing
and disinfecting water.
E.5 First Flushing: Before commencing disinfection, the Contractor shall flush mains until
effluent is clean and then clean as directed. 1 to 2 times volume of pipe is usually
required for such flushing.
E.6 Type of Chlorine: The Contractor shall disinfect with chlorine gas or solutions of
calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite and agree with the Engineer on method
of application.
E.7 Initial dosing shall be 40-50 ppm.

98
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

E.8 Contact period shall be 24 hours.


E.9 Residual Chlorine: The Contractor shall measure residual chlorine by Orthotolidin
test. Residual chlorine shall not to be less than 5 ppm or the test shall be repeated as
directed.
E.10 Final Flushing: After disinfection, the Contractor shall reflush network until chlorine
concentration in water leaving main is less than 1 ppm.
E.11 Tests: The Contractor shall perform bacteriological tests to AWWA C651-92, Section
9. Number of samples shall be one per 1 km of main feeders and one per 0.25 km of
distribution lines.
E.12 Procedure after Cutting into Existing Main: To AWWA C651, Section 11.
F. Field Protection and Coating
F.1 Iron Pipes: Polyethylene sleeving shall be to ANSI/AWWA C105, Section 4.1 or ISO
8180 or in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Sleeving shall be heavy
duty blue color polyethylene with a minimum thickness of 225 microns.
F.2 Patented Detachable and Flexible Joints and Flanged Connections: The Contractor
shall protect metal joints with mastic compound and protective tape in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. Minimum overlap shall be 55% and the
Contractor shall press out firmly all folds and irregularities.
G. Anti Corrosion Tape
G.1 The tape shall consist of a PVC backing bonded to a self adhesive bituminous rubber
compound with a total thickness of approximately 1.65 mm.
G.2 The plastic backing shall be extruded PVC and shall have an approximate thickness
0.35 mm.
G.3 Pressure sensitive adhesive compound which don’t need any base layer to achieve
complete adhesion with below layer with 0.75mm thickness. Coefficient of viscosity
of bitumen flow at 200˚C and 175˚C is 5.5 Poise and 7.5 Poise respectively.
G.4 Silicone paper is added to the tape to ensure cleanness of edges with width 25mm
over tape width.
G.5 When the tape is to be applied with a 50-55 % overlap the tape shall have a “guide-
line” printed down the center of the tape to ensure accurate overlapping is achieved.
G.6 The tape shall be black, cold applied complying with AWWA C209. The tape shall
have the following minimum properties:
 Backing Thickness: 0.3 - 0.4 mm
 Backing Adhesive Thickness: 0.75 - 0.90 mm
 Tensile Strength: 14.8 N/mm2
 Adhesive Shear Strength: 0.10 N/mm2
 Impact Resistance: > 20 drops
 Dielectric Strength: 20 kv
G.7 Coatings and tapes shall be inspected prior to and after installing, and the Contractor
shall notify the Engineer of any defects. Any defective areas shall be repaired in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
H. Waterproofing of Structures
H.1 Waterproofing of water retaining structures shall not be commenced until tested for
water-tightness and found satisfactory.
H.2 The waterproofing compound shall penetrate and react with the concrete to form

99
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

crystals that seal all capillaries, tracts and shrinkage cracks in the concrete structure.
The compound shall consist of a mixture of chemicals, quartz, sand and cement
supplied in powder form ready to mix with water. Application shall be carried out in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the
Engineer.

3-4-4 VALVES, GATES, STOPS, WATER CONECTIONS FIRE HYDRANTS


AND SUNDRY WORKS
3-4-4-1 GENERAL
A. Scope
A.1 These works shall consist of furnishing all materials, constructing, installing and
completing in all respects of works described in this Specification and indicated on the
Drawings.
3-4-4-2 VALVES
The paragraphs below on the specifications of the valves that the valves are to be
installed for connectivity to the system (SCADA).
A. Gate Valves Cast Iron
A.1 Type: Gate valves shall be used for diameters from 50 mm to less than 300mm and
shall be of Ductile Cast Iron (Ductile Cast Iron GGG40) to DIN3202 or equivalent and
anti corrosive cast iron operation stem which does not rise during operation
(Nonirising Stem) and the gate in made of copper or cast iron covered with rubber and
all parts of the valve must bear operating pressure not less than 16 bars.
A.2 Type: socket ends for diameters below 150 to BS 5163 or equivalent and flanged ends
for diameters 150 m and greater (in valve chambers) to BS 4504 or equivalent or
ISO3606 and ISO4422 or equivalent.
A.3 Material of component for socket and flanged valves:
- The valve body from ductile cast iron to (GGG40) (EN –JS1030).
- The gate is covered totally with rubber.
- Valve non-rising stem from Stainless steel. The valve is operated either directly
by hard wheel or by a spindle.
- Testing of valves is done as per specification o DIN 3230 or EN 12266 –
Part 4 or equivalent.
A.4 Operation is either by hand-wheel or by spur gear drive operated by removable key
with a rising stem depending on the depth of installation which may require inner gear
as per Engineers or manufactures direction.
A.5 Protection Type: Painting inner and outer surfaces by epoxy with a thickness not less
than 250 microns as per specifications.
B. Butterfly Valves:
B.1 Type: Butterfly valves flanged on both sides with pressure 10/16 Bars shall be used
for diameters greater or equal to 300 mm manufactured to comply with EN593
specification or equivalent.
B.2 Components:
- Butterfly value is of the fixed plate type not coaxial with the stem.

100
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

- Valve body is manufactured form ductile cost iron (GGG-40).


- Valve length is to comply with DIN3202 F4 series 14 and EN558-1 or
equivalent.
- Valve stem is of anticorrosion cast iron.
- Flanges are to comply with DIN2501 or equivalent.
- Valve is opened and closed via the gear box mounted on the valve.
B.3 Operation by hand-wheel.
B.4 Protection Type: Painting the inner and exterior surfaces by epoxy with a thickness
not less than 250 microns as per specification.
C. Check Valves:
C.1 Check valves for sizes 50-250 mm will be equipped with a gate that will open
horizontally compatible to an operation pressure 16 Bars.
C.1.1 Material of component parts: Valve body of cast iron (GG25) to specifications of EN-
JL 1040 or equivalent and the plate from cast iron or bronze, and the interacting parts
between plate and base should be cooper to rubber or cupper to cupper.
C.1.2 Parts connection will be flanged as per DIN2501 specification or equivalent.
C.1.3 Protection type is by epoxy paint with a thickness not less than 250 micron as per
specification.
C.2 Check valves for series greater than 300mm will be equipped with a stanted seat as per
EN12334 specification or equivalent for operating pressure up to16 bars.
C.2.1 Material of Component Parts:
- Valve body and the plate is of ductile coast iron GGG-40 as or EN-JS1030
specification or equivalent.
- Valve stem is of stainless steel (I-4021).
- Closing base between valve and plate shall have welded Nickel.
- The length of the valve: in accordance to the specifications (DN 3202,
F4) academic equivalent.
C.2.2 Parts Connection shall be flanged as pr specification DIN2501 or equivalent.
C.2.3 Protection type is by epoxy paint with a thickness not less than 250 microns as per
specification.
C.2.4 Shocks Absorption Unit
Valves shall be suitable to be equipped with shocks absorption units that work
hydraulically by valve which will be the media to absorb shocks. Generally these
instruments are installed on valve sizes greater than 400 mm.
D. Flap Valves
It is valve to prevent backflow installed at pipe ends.
D.1 Type: To be flange mounted, designed for use on end closures to prevent entrance of
backwater. Seating plane is to have 10 deg. inclinations.
D.2 Materials: Cast iron body and cover, bronze seat faces, bronze hinge pins and spring
pins, cast iron follow ring and plated steel ring draw bolts. Materials subject to de-
zincification or de-aluminuzation are not to be used.
D.3 End Connections: If flange mounted, flanges are to be toDIN2501 or equivalent.
D.4 Factory Protection: Painting surfaces with epoxy with layers not less than 250

101
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

microns as per specification.


E. Float Valves
E.1 Type: Globe pattern mounted horizontally or vertically used to control water level in
tanks.
E.2 Control and operation shall be done through the valve external floater depending on
water level in the tank.
E.3 Valve positioning control consists of float operated linkage mechanism for remote
mounting which feeds water level changes back to main valve through low friction,
flexible push-pull cable supplied by same manufacturer.
E.4 Construction: Cast iron body (GGG-40) to ASTM A126 or equivalent, bronze valve
trim and valve operating mechanism to ASTM B62 and all stainless steel valve float
and pilots.
E.5 Factory Protection: Internal coating of epoxy to a thickness of at least 250 microns and
external coating of epoxy and nickel plating to a thickness of at least 250 microns.
F. Air Valves for Water Mains
F.1 Generally: Valves are to have ductilecast iron body (GGG-40) to EN-JS 1030 or
equivalent and bolted cover rubber outlet seat, plastic or stainless ball. Valves are to
be dynamic type where there is no possibility of ball being drawn into orifice due to
high air velocities. Valves are to be factory tested to 1.5 times working pressure and
factory coated with epoxy to BS 4164 [5] or BS 3416 [4] respectively. Thickness of
coat is to be at least 250 microns.
F.2 Double Air Valves (or Combination Air Valves): These are required for relieving air
under pressure and in bulk. Large orifice releases or admits air during charging or
emptying of mains while small orifice releases air accumulated at summits of mains
under pressure. Large orifice area is to be equal to or greater than inlet of valve.
Valves are to be fitted with nitrite rubber lined butterfly valve with nylon coated disc
on stainless steel shaft operated by lever handle with indicator and locking thumb
screw. Valves are to be flanged to BS 4504 [2] or DIN2501 or equivalent (PN16) and
suitable for working pressures up to NP16.
F.3 Single Air Valves: Type 1 (or air / vacuum valve) for releasing or admitting air during
filling or emptying of pipes. Type II (or air release valve) is for automatically
releasing, under pressure, accumulated air at summits of mains. Air valves larger than
50 mm are to be flanged to BS 4504 [2] or DIN2501 or equivalent and are to have
nitrite rubber lined butterfly valve or gate valve with nylon coated disc on stainless
steel shaft operated by lever handle with indicator and locking thumb screw. Air
valves 50 mm and smaller are to have B.S.P. thread with brass or gun metal male
screwed stop valves. Valves are to be suitable for working pressures up to NP16.
G. Pressure Reducing Valves - Generally
G.1 Types: Installed where shown on the Drawings to pressure ratings and pressure
settings indicated, to automatically reduce higher inlet pressure to steady lower
downstream pressure regardless of changing flow rate and/or varying inlet pressure.
Valves are to be high pressure rating piston type and hydraulic pilot operated type.
G.2 Accessibility: Maintenance is to be possible without removing valve from pipeline.
G.3 Material of component: valve shall be to (DIN3202) F1 or (ISO5752 series 1) or
equivalent and the valve body and cover are of cast iron GGG-40 and the value base
and disk from stainless steel.
G.4 End Connections: Flanged to DIN2501 or BS 4504 [2] to pressure rating of 10, 16 or

102
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

25 as appropriate and provided from factory with necessary bolts, washers, nuts and
gaskets.
G.5 Factory Protection: Internal coating of epoxy to be in a thickness of at least 250
microns and external coating of epoxy and nickel plating is to be in a thickness of at
least 250 microns.
H. Piston Pressure Reducing Valves
H.1 Type: Spring loaded type, balanced out against upstream pressure by high resistance
piston action.
H.2 Size: Valve shall be selected for maximum flow rate recommended by manufacturer
and for maximum water velocity of 1.5 m/s to prevent cavitations inside valve or in
pipeline downstream of valve. Valve diameter is to be same as pipeline but valve
opening size is to be suitable to ensure above requirements.
H.3 Balancing: The effect of upstream pressure on upper surface of main valve disc is to
be balanced by the effect of the pressure acting piston action from below. The effect
of downstream pressure acting under water on main valve disc is to be compensated
by adjustment of the spring compression.
H.4 Control Pressure: Valve shall control a constant downstream pressure to a maximum
variation of +/- 10% and close tight with zero flow rates.
H.5 Accessories: These shall include two pressure gauges with isolation cocks, one fitted
upstream and one downstream.
I. Diaphragm Pressure Reducing Valves
I.1 Type: Pilot controlled, single seated, hydraulically operated, diaphragm type globe
valve. Control system is to be sensitive to slight pressure changes and is to im-
mediately control main valve to maintain desired downstream pressure. Pressure
setting adjustment is to be made with single adjustment screw protected by a housing
that can be sealed.
I.2 Construction: Body and cover are to be cast iron, ductile iron or cast steel depending
upon operating pressure. Main valve trim is to be stainless steel and pilot system all
stainless steel. Main valve is to have single removable seat and resilient disc.
I.3 Diaphragm assembly shall be fully guided by a precision machined stem with bearings
at both ends in the valve cover and seat. Diaphragm is to be nylon bonded with
synthetic rubber.
I.4 Accessibility: Repairs are to be possible without removing valve from line. Valve is
to have no external packing glands or stuffing boxes.
I.5 Pilots: Valve is to have necessary factory fitted pilot valves, small interconnecting
piping and accessories to perform required functions. Pilot control is to be direct ac-
ting, adjustable spring loaded, normally open, diaphragm valve designed to permit
flow when controlled pressure is less than spring setting. Control system is to include
Y-strainer, fixed orifice and isolation cocks. Pilot control system is also to include
flow control device to regulate closing speed of valve. Valve is to close tight at zero
flow rates.
J. Pressure Regulating Valves
J.1 Type: One-way valve to control water pressure and water shall be identical around
inner valve section and consisting of two annular plates perforated identically and in
the same manner with cone nozzles. Downstream plate is to be fixed and upstream
plate is to slide over fixed plate using a hand wheel.
J.2 Function: These shall be used on by-pass of pump and on main pumping station by-

103
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

pass line to limit differential pressure and water flow across pump control valve and
by-pass valve.
J.3 Construction: Ductile Cast steel GGG-40 valve body, stainless steel fixed plate with
13% Cr., bronze aluminum sliding plate, stainless steel valve shaft and perbuban 70
shore gaskets.
J.4 Accessories: Hand-wheel is to have micrometric indicator to indicate valve position.
Valve is to be designed for working pressure of 25 bars.
J.5 Protection Type: interior and exterior layer of epoxy with a thickness at least 250
microns.
K. Flow control valves:
These valves works by electricity; it consists of many holes with blowers and fixed
perforated plate, these valves are designed to control the flow rate using pressure
differential theory, Valves must be tested under max operation conditions to be
ensured that the operation will be free from cavitations, the contractor must be submit
performance curves for each valve including :(flow, the losses in pressure, coefficient
of cavitations) in his submitted tender documents. Valve’s parts indicate in the
following:
 Container / cover IP-55 equipped with control keys and pressing buttons,
signal lamps, and control key for a local dimension.
 Pressure transmitter with standard outlet ranges between 4 and 20 MAH
 An indicator determines the local position.
 Position transmitter with standard outlet ranges 4 20 MAH
 Conversion and processing unit contain a microprocessor to control for the
flow rate, flow indicators, total volume indicator, with suitable output
discharge to indicate the flow rate, the total volume and valve location.
In addition, the contractor must be put a significant, help us to determine the valve
location.
Materials:
- Main body, the plate of motion:
Ductile iron, accordance to (DIN 1963 GGG 50 Or 40)
- Fixed plate:
Stainless steel according to the (ASTM Grad TP 316L)
- Other parts
The Materials of other parts of the valve should be suitable with the water
quality to avoid a corrosion problem
- Power supply: 220/380 F 60 Hz
L. Over-speed Isolating Valves
L.1 Type: Hydraulically controlled, butterfly valve opened by overhead hoist and closed
by weight. Valves are to automatically shut-off at rapid flow that may occur in case of
pipe bursts or increase in water velocity above normal average.
L.2 Install where shown on the Drawings, to the size, pressure ratings and water flow
closing settings shown.
L.3 Detection system shall comprise an apparatus connected to control panel supplied with

104
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

the valve to detect over speed.


L.4 Shut-off mechanism shall consist of mechanical and hydraulic oil system ensuring
irrevocable shutting off valve when over speed is detected.
L.5 Construction: Valve body, disc and accessories are to be as specified for butterfly
valves.
L.6 Accessories shall include necessary devices to provide controlled operation, shut-off
delay, non-operation by temporary over speeding and remote signaling by limit
switches. Closing speed shall be adjustable.
M. General Control and Operation Valves
M.1 General: Pump control valves, slow-closing slow-opening pump check valves, surge
control valves, air release and vacuum breaker valves and by-pass valves are to be
automatic, hydraulically operated, pilot controlled, piston actuated, single seated,
globe or angle pattern as shown on the Drawings, consisting of valve body, piston
assembly and cover with the piston assembly as the only moving part. Valves are to be
size and pressure rating shown on the Drawings and are to be the product of one
reputable approved manufacturer.
M.2 Construction: Valve body is to be ductile cast iron GGG-40 to EN-JS 1030standard,
flanged, with flange rating as shown on the Drawings and containing a removable seat
insert.
M.3 Accessibility: Repairs are to be possible without removing valve from line. Valve is
to have no external packing glands or stuffing boxes.
M.4 Pilots: Valve shall be supplied complete with factory fitted pilot valves, small
interconnecting piping and accessories to perform required functions. Pilot control
system is to be stainless steel to AISI type 303.
M.5 Factory Protection: Internal coating of epoxy to a thickness of at least 250 microns and
external coating of epoxy and nickel plating to a thickness of at least 250 microns.
M.6 Design Data: The Contractor shall provide manufacturer with necessary and pertinent
data for setting control valves, at factory, to required settings to suit individual
conditions of different pumping stations.
M.7 Shop Drawings And Instructions: Prior to shipping valves from factory, submit shop
drawings for approval giving factory settings, range of adjustments, control diagram,
wiring diagram, size, arrangement and other pertinent data necessary for approval by
the Engineer of every control valve in the system. Submit with the shop drawings
detailed instructions for field adjustment and setting, installation, start-up and proper
operation.
M.8 Factory Test: Each control valve is to be tested individually at factory and certified
test results submitted.
M.9 Field Adjustment: The Contractor shall provide the services of a specialized factory
technician or engineer to set, test, adjust and commission the control valves as
specified.
N. Washout Valve
- Washout valves shall be gate valves as per flanged valves specifications, and
shall be installed in valve chambers as indicated on drawings or as by
Engineers direction.
- Washout valves shall be installed at the lowest level in the main water as per
drawings or Engineers directions.
3-4-4-3 FIRE HYDRANTS

105
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

A. General
A.1 These specifications shall corer fire hydrants installed on potable water pipes in the
streets and shall be of above ground hydrant type as to DIN 3222 specification or
equivalent.
A.2 Fire hydrants shall be of Above Ground Type consisting of two separate parts
connected by a flange in the middle, and the bolts shall be designed in a manner that
allow dismantling the upper part from the lower part, and in a way that allows the fine
hydrant to receive shocks without allowing breakage of the fine hydrant body or
leakage of water.
A.3 Fire hydrant shall be designed in a way that allows dismantling of inner parts such as
rising stem, control valve for maintenance needs without the need to dismantle the
valve.
B. Scope
B.1 Sizing: The height of upper part of the fire hydrant shall not be less than 60 cm above
ground, and the height of buried part of fire hydrant shall not be less than 120 cm
below ground level.
B.2 Parts
B.2.1 External Outlets shall be threaded in the upper part and the main internal nominal
diameter shall be 4 inch and the side outlets shall be 2.5 inch
B.2.2 Intermediate Flange
Dimension of flange with respect to diameter and number of openings for upper part
should be identical to those in lower part.
B.2.3 Lower Inlet
Water inlet in the lower part shall be with a hollow-end to hold a 100mm pipe, or the
end should be flanged as per request with dimensions to international specifications
ISO 2531 or equivalent.
C Parts
C.1 Fire Hydrant Body and Upper Cover
C.1.1 Fire hydrant body shall have the Barrel Body shape that surrounds inner parts and
covered with a hydrant cap supplied by an insulating rubber ring bonnet gasket.
C.1.2 The fire hydrant upper barrel part shall be of ductile cast iron (GGG40/50) to
international or German or equivalent specification.
C.1.3 The Bury standing pipe and the upper cap shall be of the best ductile cast iron type or
ductile cast iron GG25.
C.1.4 The body and cap shall be coaled with epoxy on inside and outside surfaces with a
layer of thickness at least 250 microns or what is equivalent from other types of anti-
corrosive paints that does not react with water. The coating shall be applied to clean
surfaces form dusts or oil. The coating for the external upper part should be red color.
C.2 Stem
C.2.1 The stem shall connect the upper and lower part in such a way to control with it the
opening and closing of the regulating valve at the upper part of hydrant.
C.2.2 The stem shall be anti corrosive cast iron with chrome percentage not less than 13%
and Bronze plates.
C.2.3 The stem shall be mounted in the regulating valve body through a copper nut in such a
way where the opening can be done in a counter lock wise way.
C.3 Outlet Nozzles

106
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

C.3.1 Unless otherwise stated, the fire hydrant shall be provided with 3 outlets, one main 4
inch and 2 side threaded 2.5 inch outlets
C.3.2 All outlets shall be equipped with a metal cap connected to fire hydrant body in a
suitable way through a chain which allows rotation both way and do not make
restrictions during opening and closing of cap.
C.4 Inlet Base
C.4.1 The lower part shall be supply be supplied with a Duck Food Bend with a socket end
for a 100mm pipe or with a flanged end as required.
C.4.2 The Dock Foot Bend shall be of ductile cast iron GGG-40/50.
C.5 Junction Diameter
C.5.1 The junction connecting the fire hydrant and the water main shall be 100 mm when the
water main is 100mm.
C.5.2 The junction diameter shall be 150 mm when the water main size greater than 150 mm
C.6 Closing Valve
A gate valve shall be installed at a 1m distance from the fire hydrant and shall be to
the specification of gate valves.
D. Over Flow and in Release System
D.1 The fire hydrant shall be supplied with a suitable system to drain water from the
hydrant body and prevent it from freezing when the hydrant is closed.
D.2 The hydrant shall be designed to empty entrapped air inside it through air release
valve or any compatible system.
E. Installation of the Hydrants
E-1 The fire hydrants shall be installed as specified on plans or as per Engineer’s direction
at easily accessible locations and reduce any damages due to vehicles passage.
E.2 Fire hydrant shall be supplied with safety bars for protection form traffic accidents.
3-4-4-4 HOUSE CONNECTION
A. Water connection
A.1 Water connection shall constitute of saddle connection mounted on water line,
connections, connection pipes, water meter boxes, connections and any other item.
A.2 Locations and diameters of house connections, location of connections shall be as
drawings and as Engineer’s directions during project construction, and number and
diameters that shall be installed as per drawing and bill of quantities.
A.3 Connection Pipes
Domestic connection pipes shall be of high density polyethylene as mentioned in item
(3-4-3-1) pressure category 10 Kg/cm2.
A.4 Connection to water main (saddle connection)
A.4.1 House connections shall be connected to water main through saddle as shown in
drawings and as per Engineer’s direction.
A.4.2 Type of saddle that will be used in connecting house connection will be ductile iron in
case the water main is ductile iron or from polyethylene as specified in case the water
main or polyethylene.
A.4.3 The saddle connections will be installed as per drawings and manufacturers
specification that should be applied precisely.
A.5 Installation of house connections

107
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

The contractor shall clean site, excavate, backfill, install, and put the bedding for pipes
and paving to the specifications as in the main network.
A.6 Testing and Disinfecting House Connection
House connections shall be tested and disinfected to specifications and as done in the
main network.
A.7 Files of House Connection Locations
The Contractor shall reserve accurate files for the locations of house connections
showing diameter length and the files shall be in a pre-specified format and available
for revision and ready to be submitted to the owner. The contractor shall transfer the
information into charts in accordance with the Engineer in addition to three copies that
shall be submitted to the owner.
3-4-4-5 JOINTING MATERIALS AND ADAPTORS
A. Generally
A.1 Gaskets: Elastomeric full face 3 mm thick joint rings to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681-2
[10] with dimensions to BS 3063 [38].
A.2 Rings: Elastomeric to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681-2 [10] with dimensions to
manufacturer's recommendations to suit type of joint required.
A.3 Bolts and Nuts: ISO metric black hexagon to BS 4190 [39], minimum tensile strength
433 MN/m2, maximum elongation 17%. After fixing, bolt projection shall to be
maximum 6 mm, minimum 3 mm.
A.4 Washers: Black steel shall be to BS 4320 [40] or ISO/R 887.
B. Flexible Couplings
B.1 Type: Gasket sleeved type, to allow angular deflection and axial movement of two
joined pipe ends and to maintain permanent, leak-tight joint.
B.2 Components comprise one centre sleeve, two end followers or flanges, two rubber-
compounded wedge-section gaskets and sufficient draw bolts and nuts to properly
compress gaskets. Tightening of bolts to draw end followers together is to compress
gaskets in recess between centre sleeve and followers onto pipe ends to effect positive
seal.
B.3 Size: Couplings are to have diameter specifically supplied for and to properly fit type
of joined pipe ends. Centre sleeve is to be of adequate thickness and whole coupling
suitable for minimum working pressures shown on the Drawings.
B.4 Centre Sleeve and Followers shall be true circular sections, free from irregularities,
flat spots or surface defects and formed from steel mill sections with space between
sleeve and follower designed to provide confinement of gasket.
B.5 Bolts shall be special steel having minimum yield strength of 2800 kg/cm2 (40,000
psi) and ultimate strength of 4200 kg/cm2 (60,000 psi). Bolts shall be track-head
design to prevent turning when nut is drawn up and threads are to be rolled with a
nominal diameter larger than diameter of shank. Manufacturer shall supply
information regarding recommended torque to which bolts are to be tightened.
B.6 Gaskets shall be synthetic rubber-base compound with other products to produce
material which will not deteriorate from age, heat or exposure to air and which is
resilient and able to resist cold flow of material so that joint will remain sealed and
tight indefinitely when subjected to shock, vibration, pulsation, temperature and ad-
justment of connected pipes.

108
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B.7 Factory Protection: Coupling shall be factory painted internally with 10 mils coating
of epoxy and externally with red primer to AWWA 203 Type B chlorinated rubber
solution compatible with bitumen, coal tar and general paints.
B.8 Installation: Couplings are to be assembled on site in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions to ensure permanently tight joints under all conditions of expansion,
contraction, shifting and settlement.
C. Dismantling Couplings
C.1 Type: These shall ensure extensible connection between sections of pipe work, to be
mounted next to valves to enable easy dismantling from pipe work or to permit joining
pipe work when butterfly valve is removed for maintenance.
C.2 Components: Dismantling piece shall be flanged type composed of two parts, one
sliding into the other, and a free flange to compress a trapezoidal section seal to ensure
water tightness. Coupling shall have locking devices to provide elements of complete
rigidity.
C.3 Construction: All steel with flanges class PN 10, PN 16 or PN 25 depending upon
coupling location on pipe work.
C.4 Size: Couplings shall have diameter specifically supplied for and to properly fit type
of joined ends of pipes and valves. Coupling shall permit tightening of end flanges
without risk of misalignment. Seal shall be locked after end joints are tightened.
D Flanged Adaptor: Ferrous
D.1 Material: Cast iron to BS EN 545 [1].
D.2 Length of adaptor shall be 200 mm for diameters up to 150 mm, 250 mm for
diameters between 200 and 300 mm and as approved for diameters larger than 300
mm.
D.3 Factory Protection: Coated with bitumen or coal tar to BS 3416 [4] or 4164 [5]
respectively.
3-4-4-6 VALVE ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories
A.1 Hand-wheels shall be to BS 5163 [25], of cast iron to BS EN 1561 [29]. Hand-wheels
are to be marked 'CLOSE' with an arrow to indicate clockwise direction of closure.
Diameters and other constructional details shall be to manufacturer's standards. Hand-
wheels are to be supplied at a rate of 1 in 5 valves.
A.2 Valve caps shall be to BS 5163 [25], of cast iron or malleable iron to BS EN 1561 [29]
and BS EN 1562 [41] respectively. Set screw of valve cap is to be mild steel M12.
A.3 Operation Keys: Combination prising bar and lifting key type, with 1.5 m vertical bar
and 0.5 m horizontal bar. Keys are to be supplied at a rate of 1 in 5 valves.
A.4 Extension Spindles for Gate Valves Manufactured from: Steel to BS 2470 [42] - M12
for diameters less than 300mm. And the spindle will have manual key of T Type
Protection Tubes: Cast iron. Shape, sizes and other constructional details are to be to
manufacturer's standards and/or as shown on the Drawings. Tubes are to have caps
circling extension spindles.
A.5 Surface boxes shall be to BS 5834 [43] Part 2. Frames and lids are to be cast iron to
BS EN 1561 [29], studs, bolts, nuts and hinge pins are to be mild steel M12, chains are
to be mild steel or wrought iron and lid is to have the letter 'W' cast on. Boxes are to
be of the following types:

109
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

 For carriageways (wheel loads up to 11.5 tons): Heavy grade type A


 For use where heavy commercial vehicles are exceptional (7 tons):Medium grade
type M
 For use in places that cannot be wheeled vehicle access to (2.5 tons): the degree
of light type (l). There is a bump on the box to the axis of the cavity so that it
can enter key on the T-shaped for ease of opening and will be written on the
cover word (water) in both Arabic and English.
A.6 Lifting Key Sets: Malleable iron, supplied at the rate of 1 per 5 covers installed or
fraction thereof.
A.7 Guards for Underground Stop Valves: PVC, shape and size and other constructional
details to manufacturer's standards and/or as shown on the Drawings.
B. Valve Chambers and Markers
B.1 Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings all backflow preventers, gate valves,
pressure regulators, electric solenoid valves, manual control valves, pressure gauges
and water meters shall be installed in chambers of suitable size for easy access.
Chambers shall be complete with access covers, ladder rungs and other incidental
works.
B.2 Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings all chambers shall be installed on a suitable
base for proper foundation and easy leveling to proper grade, and also to provide for
sufficient drainage.
B.3 Valve markers showing the reference numbers of the valves shall be of materials and
to the dimensions, shapes and details as shown on the Drawings.
3-4-4-7 VALVE OPERATORS
A. General
A.1 Gate, butterfly and ball valves are to be manually or electrically operated depending
upon size, torque applied on valve stem or as shown on the Drawings and the bill of
quantities.
A.2 Valves 250 mm and smaller are to be operated manually with a maximum applied
torque on hand wheel of 100 Nm
A.3 Valves of higher torque are to have appropriate thrust bearings, slides and gearboxes
to fulfill these requirements
A.4 Butterfly valves 300 mm and larger are to be either manually or electrically operated
as shown on the Drawings and bill of quantities.
B. Manual Gearboxes
B.1 Type: Totally enclosed, sealed construction to protect moving parts from damage and
corrosion. Gearbox is to be either spur or level type depending upon mounting
position of valve.
B.2 Components shall include corrosion resistant bearings, and gearbox of cast iron or
aluminum with anti-leak cover. Housing cover is to have indicator window to show
position of valve. Gearbox is also to have stainless steel bolts.
C. Electric Valve Operators
C.1 Type: These shall consist of suitable gearbox and electric motored hand wheel for
manual operation.
C.2 Installation shall be suitable for flange mounting directly on valve body, for gate
valves the operating shall be of non rising stem type.

110
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

C.3 Rating shall be of adequate horse-power and thrust ratings to open and close operated
valve smoothly at all conditions of load and pressure.
C.4 Components shall include adjustable mechanical stop- limiting devices to prevent
over-travel of valve in either direction. In addition, components will include safety
key to prevent increase in rotation momentum.
C.5 Construction: Weatherproof, with rugged cast iron housing and with hand wheel
having appropriate gearing for emergency manual operation such that maximum
applied torque is 150 Nm. Declutch lever is to disengage drive motor during hand
wheel operation and prevent hand wheel rotating during power operation for safety of
personnel. Hand wheels are to close valve in counter clockwise direction and are to
have arrows and the word 'CLOSE' cast on.
C.6 Controls shall comprise integral electric controls enclosed within weatherproof
compartment and including magnetic starter and reversing controller for motor, open-
stop- close push-button for local operation, and switches for manual or remote
operation with indication of operator condition.
C.7 Electric Motor: Totally enclosed, squirrel cage, induction type conforming to NEMA
Publication No. MG1 including characteristics, tests and ratings. Motor shall carry
maximum possible load encountered in valve operation under all normal and abnormal
operating conditions.
3-4-4-8 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Generally
A.1 Prior to Installation, the Contractor shall inspect for cleanliness of bores, seating
surfaces etc. and for handling damage, cracks, missing parts and tightness of pressure-
containing bolting.
A.2 The Contractor shall ensure gates and hydrants are in closed position before
installation.
A.3 Operate hydrants through one complete opening and closing cycle in the position in
which they are to be installed to ensure proper functioning.
B. Installation of Valves
B.1 Prior to installation, valves shall be inspected for cleanliness of bore, seating surfaces
etc. and for handling damage, cracks, missing parts and tightness of bolting. Valves
shall be in close position before installation.
B.2 Valves shall be operated through one complete opening and closing cycle in the
position in which they are to be installed to ensure proper functioning.
B.3 Valves shall be set and jointed to the pipe in the manner specified for laying and
jointing pipe and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Each valve
shall be provided with a concrete pad as shown on the Drawings so that the pipe does
not support the weight of the valve. Valves shall not be used to spring misaligned pipe
into alignment during installation.
B.4 Valves without concrete pads shall be placed on firm footing to prevent settling and
excessive strain on connection to pipe.
B.5 All stressed bolts (bonnet, seal plate and end connections) shall be inspected for
adequate tightness after installation and prior to field testing.
B.6 Valves shall be protected against action of external agents by a coat of approved
bituminous compound, applied cold by hand brushing after pressure tests on pipelines
have been completed. Buried bolts etc., shall be protected against corrosion, with

111
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

approved paint or polyethylene wrapping.


3-4-4-9 AUTOMATIC BUTTERFLY VALVE OPERATED WITH ELECTRIC
MOTOR (VALVE ACTUATOR)
A. The design form and materials
Butterfly valve of the type that erected on valve actuator with the specifications and
operating conditions for the network of irrigation water by 3230 DIN and
(PREN12116) for the erection sequence.
Body: flexible steel sides of annular solid edges with supports.
Disk : from Iron Steel with a flexible central axis multiplier. Disk axis and column
axis and chairs are designed for maximum hydraulic flow pattern and the slow flow
coefficient.
B. Sealant
Ring seal of infinite lateral sector of rubber ethylene / propylene and can be changed
without having to disassemble the disk.
C. Installation
Disk installation: Ductile iron.
Configuration: the stainless steel.
Link between the disk and the axis and the axis in the concentrate into the valve body
by Riveter Valves is less than 900 mm and a ring with measurements larger than that
reached by screws with serrated nuts Association.

D. BEARING ASSEMBLY
Completely surrounded and its parts from corrosion resistant materials and the axial
insulated with ring (from the rubber of Ethylene propylene)
E. The gears
 Spiral gear is not a reflection of excellent spiral gear.
 Sealed to water pressure.
 Maintenance: fat free fluid filling 100%.
 High resistance to fracture and that can get by the force of running excessive.
 Valve can be operated by one person.
F. Corrosion Protection (paint enamel / epoxy)
Body: the inside coating of the entire surface with enamel paint and outside surface
with a first face of the final plastic glossy and light green color on two layers of epoxy
light green as well.
G. real hard enamel for desk
Corrosion protection consistent with the recommendations of KTW.
H. Valve actuator
Group of mechanical actuation for valve ,which operate with electrical motor, consists
of an electric motor , reducing jagged end , mechanical key and the Panel where all
these parts will be in a box, and connected with the axis conductivity in the offense.
Cover must be protected from water, humidity, and contains an entrance to connect
with cables of operating the engine and other electrical equipment.
The electric motor must be of a two-way features type of high suitable for the service

112
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

and to be designed for work continuously for not less than two minutes for the
diameters of 400 mm and above, and one minute for diameters less than 400 mm with
rising in temperature not exceeding 55 oC and the engine shall fulfill the
specifications ANST C50, or academic equivalent.
Engine must be running 380 volt tension Y, 60 Hz, three phases.
Motivation must be designed to allow the arrival of the engine to maximum speed
before the impact of torque required to open the valve or close it without any force on
the valve disk and the axial of fixation.
(Actuator) drive system must be provided so that manual operation can be opened or
closed valve at any time by the wheel in case of non-operating power. Without
affecting the tuning keys to the end and the system is subject to the return of power to
run at any time
Wheel must be fitted with a gear so that one person that the process of opening and
closing manual.
The wheel should be fixed in the case of electrical operation and can be disconnected
when the manual operation is used.
End key (Limit switch) must be of the type rapid separation and easy calibration and
that provider micrometer fine-tune
The end key should be connected with the mechanical movement of valve and running
through the gears regardless the valve automatically or manually operated.
Base valve is required to work to prevent any destruction in case of closure valve.
Base valve should be protected in the case of closure by a key connected with
mechanical movement, which must be calibrated at the end of the separate engine
torque at the borders of mechanical movement, which should stop the movement of a
disk valve without an increase in valve disk interval.
I. Manual labor of the valve:
The ability of the valve in manual operation should be sufficient for the work of both
closed and opened disk and able to maintain the disk of valve in its the location in all
operating conditions and in case of un- balance in the hydraulic pressure of water on
the disk.
A mechanical valve should be provided with calibration device to stop the increase in
open or close interval.
Offense , support and terminals of valve must be designed with at least five times the
safety factor based on the maximum strength and safety factor 3 for the minimum
durability of the materials used.
J. actuator electrical equipment
 The electric motor
The capacity of engine power shall be enough to force open or closed the
engine under all operating conditions and under the hydraulic pressure of the
water in the font engine works and shall be worked with Y 380 volt 60 Hz
system and fit the ANSI standard c50, or academic equivalent, which will
reach the outside temperature to 50 0C
The engine must be sealed.
Engine must be appropriate to the overall tension in the case of the start of the
type of reflected the direction of rotation features with high torque.
Starting torque must be at least 25% of the total load torque.

113
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

 End key
End key should be provided with positive leadership to work with the
mechanical part, which worked with the electrical circuit devices the
leadership of the engine for controlling the movement of closing and
opening. As well as the number 2 key torque (torque switch) petitions for these
keys (the key to the end and key torque) must be connected with the electrical
control circuit to stop working the engine and the valve must be capable of
changing during the opening or closing.
End keys must be responsive to work with meters for controlling
Key container must be airtight against water and moisture and has an entrance
for cable inlet and outlet
Keys must be suitable for V 220 and 60 Hz.
 Engine operating system
The operating system and leadership to valve actuator should be provided with
devices the leadership and operating integrated with container actuator a
separate plate of its own airtight sealing for dust and humidity mounted next to
the valve and have private entrances to connect the cables to and from it and
must contain the panel on the definitive key 3 phase is suitable for
engine actuator
Connectors to run in both directions, closing and opening. The key to choosing
to run the local and at a distance, as well as suspension
 surge protection device on the three phases
 low voltage protection device
 operation and testing keys shall be located on the outer door of panel
 Run button to open shall be with green color and red color for closed with the
bulbs.
 operating the system shall be only when press the play button to open and stop
when you do not press the button
operating devices of the engine must be appropriate in terms of power of the
engine, not less, and contain tangents to help open and normally closed
tangents back and be suitable for the Volt, which operate the engine if the 220
volt or 380 volt 60 Hz, depending on installation location of valve
The contractor shall be provide the electrical diagrams that show all the
recommendations concerning the valve operation for approval before supply.
Operation equipment must be provided with driving devices especially for
partially opening with sensors that show the opening degree to be connected to
the telemetric system with the knowledge that the approved current for this
case is (4-20 m.a.) - 4 m.a means fully enclosed and 20 m.a means fully open
and applying the calibration required for this.
 the main operator panel buttons :
Each engine shall has two buttons for instantaneous running similar to Buttons
of operating at the local panel at the site and to be provided with of
Motherboard in the control room to facilitate the automation of the main
control center and can change from automatic to manual and vice versa.
Terminals must be equipped with all appliances and equipment necessary for
the signals, as well as to connect the transmitter and receiver unit (RTU) for

114
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

the SCADA system which will send commands operating signal from the site
to the main control room.
K. Controlling of valve
Each automatic valve should be provided with all operation devices such as
keys (Local / stopped / remote controlling) and should be guaranteed in case
remote controlling and the case of local situation actuator must be provided
with button to monitoring the closing ,opening and off to control the valve
from the site. In case of automatic control the controlling shall be from the
main control panel at the control room.
In the main control panel the following information must be available
 Local valve
 Valve remote
 Valve open
 Valve closed
 Valve fault
 valve open and close buttons
 valve open percentage indication
For this purpose, the panel shall be provided with organizer has the property
of (4-20 m4) m.a and the valve opening can be adjusted through the this
organizer manually and automatically so the valve opening can be adjusted to a
certain percentage depending on the operation case.
L. The local operating panel:
each valve shall be provided with local operating panel and to be located
adjacent to the valve well sealed to prevent water , humidity, dust entry and a
composite of all devices concerning the operation and running of valve
containing the special openings for the power entry and control cables in a box
actuator
Note:
Supplier should provide all the specifications of valves and actuator as well as
control panels for valve running and operation to be offered with mechanical
and electrical drawings and indicate the period or time required to open and
closed the valve.
3-4-4-10 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS
A. Flow Meter
The measuring devices should be of ultrasonic approved type complete with gauge ,
recorder ,flow measurement device a counter , signal transfer and signal receiver and
all the accessories needed. Registration will be on the tapes shall be sensitive to
pressure and be suitable for registration for one month for each tape.
Receptors and gauges shall be connected directly to the flow measurement device .
The device shall be according to the following data:
- Installation directly on the water line
- Speed range (zero - 4) m / s with the possibility of changing
the interval at site.
- The liquid passing drinking water

115
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

- Electrodes Stainless steel


- Flanges PN 16
- Power supply 220 volts AC 60 Hz
The device is suitable for measuring the flow from zero to 125% of the maximum
expected flow. Device shall be installed at a distance of at least 10 times the diameter
of the pipe after the elbow or tees to ensure no turbulence occurring and the distance
between any elbow or (T) fittings after at least 5 times the diameter of the pipe after
the device . these distances are increased from the above according to the
requirements of the manufacturer recomendations.
The device measurement accuracy shall not exceed in all cases of installations 1% of
the reading value.
the flow meter device shall be completed with the axial and convertor to convert the
signal to a proportional signal from 4-20 ma. and the unit shall be from Solid State
type provided with printed circuits cards can be easily replaced and should be from the
pre-calibrated type and does not require any adjustment during replacement . the
ability of modification the response time could be adjusted if necessary.
the unit is completed in mm to give a list for the value of the top signal proportional.
Aslso It an adapter should be provided inside the device capable for adjustment to
limit the power current to ensure that the output current does not exceed the value
specified previously for the top level of flow.
measuring flow meter shall be installed in reinforced concrete chamber complete with
indicator gauge in steel box.
B. Transmitters
 Complete with the remote operating system and to be equipped with a special
devices for signal transfer by SCADA system and the flow can be read in both
directions as well as water flow meter (Forward Reverse and Net Flow totalizer).
 To be capable for calibration and measurement units’ l / s, m 3 / h, gallon / min as
needed.
 To be provided with cables from suitable type and length to be able of transferring
the signal flow and the discharge of water.
 To be capable for installation in areas with electromagnetic waves effects.
 To be 0 = 4 m amp and measuring the total = 20 m amp
= 4 m amp. 20 = full scale

C. Pressure sensor specifications:


Pressure should be monitoring by suitable pressure convertor (transducer) suitable for
the medium pressure and pressure ranges specified here.
Each pressure transducer should be in ranges adequate for sensitivity over the ranges
process and be able to afford the excesses of pressure up to 400% without any damage
occurrence.
Each pressure transducer Should be from solid and durable manufacturing and water-
proof as well as pressure sensitive element within surround case of stainless steel.
The power adapter must be fitted with pressure isolation barrier to be protect from the
water entering.
The power adapter must be fitted with threaded plug it into a standard Pressure BSP
for work related to the branching pipe.

116
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Sensors transducer pressure must be within the surround casing identical to IP68.
Pressure transducer Should be worked from direct power source stream of 24 volts
and to be able to convert the revived signal from the converter to a signal 4-20 MA
suitable to the range specific and should be used as inputs the field control unit "FCU"
(that is installed by others).
D. Level sensor specifications:
the water level measurement device in the reservoirs shall be from type that works
from Ultrasonic Level Sensor.
The process of monitoring reservoir levels by measuring the ultrasound equipment is
not tangent with water should include thermal compensation and timers Data subject
to change.
Power Adapter: The head of the infrared sensor must be protected with surround
insulator matched with IP68. Installed to provide a radial corridor package is disabled
and prevents any unwanted light reflections and to be within the reach of maintenance
workers in order to conduct routine detection and maintenance and where possible it
should be away from any flood conditions.
Signal Transformers: should work from the power source stream direct 24 volts and be
able to convert the received signal from the converter to a signal 4-20 ma proportional
to the range specific and should be used as inputs to field control unit "FCU" ( being
installed by others).
Transformer Should include the adapter on the base unit and programming unit all
within the casing which is surrounding by Polycarbonate IP65. The connection
between the device and programming adapter must be provided without
any exposure for calibration cover for damage.
Display screen of the LCD 3 1/2 Must be used to demonstrate the features of
programming, and cases of adjustment, and outputs.
The accuracy of signal converters should be better than + / - 1% of the variations
specified and must with the following outputs applicable for programming : -
M. amper signal matched to the known engineering units and specific to the user.
Out put contactor relay SPDT should be closed at general failure or failure in the
signal converter or Get lost for echo echoes or in case of multiple audio occurring.
Outputs contactors with SPDT tentacles stop points are set independently. And this
output must be calibrated in order to get power supply at a high level / low and, in
order to control the availability of pumps. The contactors shall be calibrated for 5
amps , 240 volts AC is provocative.
Sockets of the computer model of a serial RS232 in order to copy the data.

3-4-5 BEDDING, SURROUND, HAUNCHING, ENCASEMENT AND THRUST


BLOCKS
3-4-5-1 GENERAL
This section covers Pipe bedding, surround and ways of securing pipe installations are
specified in this Section.
3-4-5-2 MATERIALS
A. Pipe bedding and/or surround, and filling materials under and around pipes shall
comply with the appropriate requirements of Section 3-2-4.
B. All concrete work shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Division 5.

117
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

C. Concrete bedding shall be Class 110/25.


D. Concrete for encasements, thrust blocks, arches and haunches shall be Class 250/20.
E. Compressible board shall be 20 mm thick fibrous material or similar approved
material.
3-4-5-3 WORKMANSHIP
A. Placing Concrete
A.1 After placing pipe the Contractor shall pour concrete in trench and thoroughly work
under pipe to provide solid and uniform bedding.
A.2 After pipe joint is completed the Contractor shall place the balance of concrete or
hunching and work into place on both sides simultaneously.
A.3 The Contractor shall form vertical construction joints in concrete beds, surrounds etc.
at the face of pipe joints with compressible board and finish to profile of the concrete
and pipe. The Contractor shall fill any gap between spigot and socket with approved
resilient material.
B. Placing Material Other than Concrete
B.1 The Contractor shall place surround or bedding material in bottom of prepared trench
and carefully hand tamp to minimum thicknesses.
B.2 After pipe has been laid the Contractor shall place additional material or haunching in
successive layers not exceeding 150 mm thick on both sides simultaneously and
completely fill spaces between pipe and side of trench and carefully hand tamp
without disturbing the pipe.
C. Thrust Blocks
C.1 Thrust blocks shall be constructed to prevent thrust at all bends, T connections,
crossings, pipe ends, and tapers and fire-hydraulic as per Engineers direction and
design drawings. Thrust blocks shall be constructed between the solid ground and the
accessories that need to be anchored as per the details of the design drawings or
Engineer’s direction. Polyethylene sheets of 3mm thickness shall be put between
concrete and accessories to prevent cohesion. Contractor shall submit shop drawings
for thrust block constructed. No pressure shall be applied to thrust blocks for 3 days
after construction.

3-4-6 VALVE CHAMBERS


3-4-6-1 GENERAL
A. Scope
This section specifies works related to valves chambers, for air valves, washout valves
and shut off valves.
3-4-6-2 MATERIALS
A. Excavation and backfilling generally shall comply with Section 2-3 and section 3-3 of
the Specification.
B. Concrete work generally shall comply with the appropriate requirements of division 3-
5 of the Specification.
C. Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements as specified in Section “Steel
Reinforcement and Fixing".
D. Precast units to BS 5911 [13] Part 200 or ASTM C478. Except for thickness which
shall be as indicated on the drawings. Concrete shall be Class 250/20. Cement shall
be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197 [3].

118
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

E. Plain and reinforced concrete for cast In-Situ units shall be Class 210/25 and 250/25
respectively. Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197 [3].
F. Internal and External Coatings shall be as specified in A3, A4 and A5 of section 3-4-
6-3. Water proofing for external surfaces is given in Section 3-4-7.
G. Covers and frames shall be non-rocking, locking, solid top to specifications followed
by Ministry of Transport and comply with British Standards BS2789 or ISO 1083 or
DIN 1229 or BS EN 124 [31]. Equivalent, wording on cover shall indicate nature of
network (water supply), Grades shall be as follows:
 In Roadways: Heavy duty test load 40 tons
 In Sidewalks, Carriage Drive and Cycle Tracks: Medium duty test load 25 tons
 In Footpaths and Fields: Light duty, test load 7 tons
H. Covers shall be of circular pattern with a minimum diameter of 600 mm or rectangular
with an opening 1200mm x 600mm unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Frames
shall be provided with opening for fixing bolts which ensure solid frame embedment
into manhole concrete neck. Covers for air release valve chambers should be provided
with holes for ventilation. Covers and frames shall be coated with two layers coal tar
epoxy (70% epoxy, 30% coal tar) to BS 3416 [4]. Minimum thickness is 250 microns.
I. Iron steps shall be mild steel to BS 4211 [51], galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 [52]
with 200 grams of zinc per square meter and covered with two layers of polyethylene
(PE) or polypropylene.
J. Fixing bolts shall be steel, type suitable for particular purpose and use and to approval.
When used to fix galvanized material, washers are to be galvanized and fixing bolts
and nuts cut to pre-plating limits and electroplated with zinc to BS EN 12329 [53].
K. Steel castings shall be mild to medium strength castings and shall conform to
AASHTO M103 (ASTM A27). Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer, castings shall be grade 65-35 fully annealed. Steel
castings shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Test bars shall be
prepared and tested as specified in AASHTO M103.
L. Wrought iron plates and shapes shall conform to the dimensions shown on the
Drawings. Rolled wrought iron bars and shapes shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM A207(DISCONTINUED NO REPLACEMENT). Wrought iron plates shall
conform to ASTM A42(DISCONTINUED NO REPLACEMENT) .
M. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all specified test coupons and
Manufacturers' Certificates of Guarantee for all structural steel, cast iron, cast steel
and wrought iron parts stating that the materials supplied meet the appropriate
AASHTO or ASTM specification. The submission of such test certificates shall not
relieve the Contractor of his obligations to carry out independent tests at an approved
laboratory, as directed by the Engineer, at his own expense.
3-4-6-3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Valve Chambers
A.1 Construction shall be in situ concrete, precast concrete as indicated on the Drawings.
A.2 Concrete works shall comply with concrete specifications as per concrete and
reinforcement specification in section 3-5.
A.3 Bituminous slurry External concrete surfaces for valve chambers shall be coated with
bituminous slurry. External coating shall consist of two coats applied by brush in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Minimum thickness shall be 400
microns.

119
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

A.4 Internal surface for valve chambers shall be coated with two coats of epoxy.
A.5 The Contractor shall submit details of insulation material and thickness of coatings
and type of coating as per the manufacturer.
A.6 The covers frame shall be set solidly in mortar and fix firmly using fixing bolts. The
Contractor shall position the cover centrally over the opening and level and square
with surrounding finishes and set cover in position to prevent twisting.

3-4-7 RECORDS
The Contractor shall maintain accurate records details for whole project components
and show details for the following works. These records should be submitted in
hardcopy and digital forms, three copies for each form. Digital data and drawings
should be prepared in compliance with geographic information system (GIS) and
digital mapping in the directorate (if any):
A. As-Built House Connection Plan
This record is showing the sketch of the particular section indicating the mainline and
the house connection. Listed below is the information required for this record;
- Mainline number
- Mainline section number
- Length of mainline pipe
- Mainline pipe diameter and type of pipe
- Insert level of the mainline at the connection location
- Connection number & position
- Type of connection
- House connection pipe diameter
- Distance from centerline of mainline to the building
- Invert of end lateral at the building
- A column of remarks must be provided for future up-dating of house
connections
B. Mainline Records
There are three (3) important records to be maintained from constructed mainlines,
these are the general layout and bench mark, site plan and the line profiles.
Description of these records is as follows;
B.1 for General Layout & Bench Mark
This drawing must be prepared in A-0 size drafting film covering the whole area of
work executed by the contractor with an “appropriate” scale that will accommodate on
drawing sheet. Required information is as follows:
- Line numbers
- Valve chambers and fire hydrants numbers
- Name of street
- Name of important landmark in the area (i.e. mosque, school, garden, hospital,
clinic, shopping mall, government offices, etc…)
- Location of bench marks with their designated numbers and elevations
- A separate table is to be allocated describing the complete bench marks used in
the project.

120
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B.2 For Site Plans


This drawing must be prepared in A-0 size drafting film with a scale of 1:1,000
showing in segments for the entire area of work executed by the Contractor. Required
information is as follows;
- Line numbers
- Numbers of valve chambers, fire hydrants and other network accessories
- Coordinates for each and every intersection, valve chamber and fire hydrant
- Lateral distance location for each and every chamber(i.e. distance from center
of chamber to property wall or sidewalk curb stone or street light post or fire
hydrant traffic light post or any favorable base of measurement)
- Name of street
- Name of important landmark in the area (i.e. mosque, school, garden, hospital,
clinic, shopping mall, government offices, etc…)
B.3 For Line Profiles
This drawing must be prepared in A-0 size drafting film with a scale of 1:1,000
horizontal and 1:100 vertical for the entire mainlines constructed in the whole area of
work by the Contractor. Required information is as follows:
- Line number
- Surface condition
- Ground level
- Invert level
- Distance
- Thrust block
- Pipe data (pipe diameter & type of pipe, slope and bedding)
- Rock levels
- Underground utilities crossing either below or over the mainline pipes
- Type of utility
- Description
- Top elevation

3-4-8 STEEL WATER TANKS


A) General
A.1 General:
This section covers the supply, installation, testing and delivering in a state ready for
use steel water tanks.
A-2 Specifications:
In this specification, reference will be made to the latest version of the following
specifications:
AWWA D 100 or API 650 specifications for steel welded water tanks.
AWWA D 105 or API 650 specifications for cleansing / disinfecting water tanks.
BS 5950 steel manufactures industry standards.

121
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

If there is any contradiction between above international standards and specifications


of the contract, work must follow contract specifications.
A-3 Requirements:
According to these specifications the contractor shall design, prepare, supply, install
and paint steel tanks constructed from welded steel plates with steel roofing mounted
on steel trusses and based on central steel columns in addition to annular reinforced
concrete foundations including all accessories and components of the tank.
The Contractor must be a specialist in the design and manufacturing of welded steel
tanks that shall be resistant to rust; the Contractor shall provide a list and complete
data for reference including clients of five steel tanks (each of capacity not less than
half the largest capacity of individual tanks under consideration in the current project)
currently in service and working satisfactorily.
A-4 Foundations of the Tank:
Unless otherwise noted, the contractor shall conduct soil investigations, design and
construct the foundations of the tank in accordance with the current specifications and
the geotechnical report. Foundations shall be annular with axial diameter 51.6 meters,
and extends at least 0.5 meter outside the sides of the tank, in addition to annular
foundation to support central columns.
A layer of plain concrete 100 mm in thick shall be installed to be placed under the
foundations according to the specifications of plain concrete and reinforced concrete
Grade M35 in accordance with the specifications of the project.
Annular foundations are provided with 8 openings allowing drainage PVC pipes of
diameter 51 mm (NPS 2) with 8 leak detection wells to be constructed outside the
foundations. A pad satiated with asphalt (25mm thick) shall be placed on the surface
of the foundations below the bottom of the tank.
Soil replacement layer(s) to be placed underneath the foundations and bottom of the
tank according to the recommendations of geotechnical study, the soil replacement
layer(s) to be placed and compacted in accordance with the earthworks specifications
of the Project.
Polyethylene sheets 1500 microns thickness to be installed and covered with non-
woven geotextile over the soil replacement layer(s). A bituminous sand layer
(cushion) with thickness 100 mm shall be installed directly below the bottom of the
tank in accordance with the drawings.
A-5 Tanks:
Materials, design, manufacturing, installation and testing shall be made according to
the latest version of the specifications of welded steel tanks (API650), and the
American Code (AWWA D100) unless otherwise noted elsewhere. The Contractor
shall design and prepare shop-drawings, fabrication and installation of steel tank
according to the following specifications:
Steel used for constructing the tanks ASTM Steel A36.
Liquid to be stored: Water
Maximum density of stored liquid: 1000 kg / m3
Maximum temperature of stored liquid: 40 ° C

122
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Inner diameter: 51.6 m


Height of the cylindrical tank: 17 m
Maximum capacity of the tank: 30000 m3
Liquid Storage height: 15 m
Roof System: Fixed roof
Structural system for Roof: conical surface supported on steel trusses supported by
central column.
Design Temperature: 50 ° C
Wind loading: in accordance with Saudi specifications (SBC 301) and a basic wind
speed of 160 km / h.
Earthquake loads: in accordance with Saudi specifications (SBC 301):
In case of a regular time of 1 second in a spectrum response to gravity acceleration
with the assumption of a decay rate of 5%, gravity acceleration to be 12% of (G).
In case of a regular time of 0.2 seconds in a spectrum response to gravity acceleration
with the assumption of a decay rate of 5%, ground acceleration to be 40% of (G).
Maximum pumping rate for Inlet: 375 m 3 / h
Maximum pumping rate for Outlet: 1100 m 3 / h
Live load on Roof: 1 kN / m 2
Code for design, construction and testing: API 650
Welding specifications: API 650
Additional thickness for corrosion protection (CORROSION ALLOWANCE):
Bottom, sides plates and cover 3 mm
Structural members (elements) supporting roof: 1 mm
A-6 Tank Accessories:
Inlet opening: 300 mm diameter
Outlet opening: 400 mm diameter
Drainage opening: 2 x 100 mm
Overflow opening: 300 mm.
External staircase: Steel spiral staircase to be designed and constructed by the
Contractor.
Ventilation openings: 4 x 200 mm diameter
A-7 Drawings:
the contractor shall deliver coordination, manufacturing and installing drawings, in
addition to other information required from the engineer to get approvals. Drawings
and information should include - but not limited to - the followings:
Design calculations for elements designed in the factory.
Methodology for Construction, installation, linking, connecting and stamping of all
temporary fixing works.

123
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

A-8 Protection:
during and after construction, steel buildings shall be protected from construction
dangers, through approved means.
B. Accessories and installation instructions for the tanks
C. Construction of tanks and foundations shall be in accordance with American Code
(API 650) and (AWWA D100).
C.1 All tank materials should be suitable for drinking water, according to manufacturer.
Isolating materials must be suitable for drinking water and non-toxic.
C.2 Tanks must be provided with external ladders (stairs) protected against corrosion, made
from galvanized steel and installed and fixed on the external wall. Of the tank. Bolts
and nuts and washers should be galvanized according to ASTM A325, or equivalent.
C.3 Pipelines: influent, effluent, overflow and drainage pipes shall be according to
drawings and as approved by the Engineer.
C.4 Air vents and overflow pipe(s) shall be supplied with meshes to prevent insects and
mosquitoes intrusion to the tanks.
C-5 All tanks operating under normal atmospheric pressure must be tested under
conditions of "full tank" to prevent leakage and check proper structural conditions.
C-6 Tank supplied by the manufacturer shall be manufactured, assembled and installed
over concrete base, tanks must also be supplied with all piping and drainage facilities.
C.7 Shop Drawings must be provided in details including calculations, showing loads,
foundation bolts and all relevant details for approval before starting site works.
Approvals do not relief the Contractor from his full responsibility of the Works to be
constructed, tested and commissioned successfully and according to requested
specifications and do not endorse dimensions or quantities
C.8 Submitted shop drawings shall include details of wrenches, temporary bracing proposed
for use during construction, in addition to method of construction and calculating
design pressures. All workshop dimensions on drawings shall be approved on
drawings prior to manufacturing.
C.9 Inspection: All material and workmanship are subject to inspection by the Engineer who
shall be allowed for access to any part of the work easily, Contractor to provide
whatever is needed to facilitate this.
C.10 Bolts: bolts connection / anchor bolts shall be according to BS 5950 unless otherwise
mentioned.
C.11 In-situ Construction: construction program and methods must be submitted for
approval.
C.12 Anchorages & templates: these – when fixed in concrete – shall be available at site
to avoid delay of works.
C.13 Foundations: Before starting construction work, checks shall be made for position
levels, anchorages, exposed lengths for anchor bolts, etc
C.14 Manufactured and damaged materials shall be substituted as directed and to the
approval of the Engineer.

124
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

C.15 Structural loads (Pressures): During construction it is not allowed that structural /
construction pressures of exceeds values cited in BS 5950.
C.16 Bracing during construction shall be conducted to maintain stability of structures.
Removal of such bracing is when structure stability allows so and following approval
by Engineer.
C.17 Cutting tools: cutting equipment/tools using heat are not allowed at site without prior
approval from Engineer
C.18 Welding equipment: Its use shall be after prior approval by the Engineer.
C.19 Movement Joints: ensure that bolts / screws are centered in holes after structure
construction.
C.20 sliding joints shall be in accordance to manufacturer recommendations.
C.21 Bases: levels shall be adjusted using Sawn Packs with appropriate size.
C.22 Base Plates: spaces underneath base plates shall be filled with material approved by
the Engineer.
C.23 Leak test: After painting, tank shall be washed and disinfected followed by performing
leak test according to the steps described in American Codes (API 650) and (AWWA
D100).
C.24 Disinfection: This must be conducted with chlorine, sodium hypochlorite or calcium
hypochlorite. The first dose should be 10-20 (ppm). Residual Chlorine must be at least
5 (ppm) measured by orthotolitin test after a period of 24 hours. After accepting the
test, the tank must be emptied and cleaned as approved by the Engineer.
C.25 Suction Test After tank construction and before the leak test is performed, tank bottom
must be tested for leak according to the steps described American Codes (API 650)
and (AWWA D 100)
C.26 Earthling: the tank must be earthed by earthing conductors cross-section 50 mm2 (at
least) from copper isolated with polyvinyl chloride and welded by thermal expulsion
to the steel tank at distances of 20 m each interval.
Each earthling conductor must be connected to the ground by the grounding poles
(each consisting of an iron rod copper-plated with length 3000 mm and 16 mm
diameter including an inspection hole from concrete 300x300x200 mm) all in
accordance with British Standards
D. Quality Control
D.1 Inspection Agency: Agency must set the test and review an independent and approved
test for welded and bolted connections to make tests and prepare test reports.
D.2 the agency will conduct and analyze the tests and describes in each report whether test
specimens is according to the required specifications, as well as to identify any
variation from project requirements.
D.3 the testing agency: Agency should be allowed to access of steel manufacturing
workshops, to carry out the necessary inspections and tests.
D.4 Testing agency: the Agency is allowed to inspect the steel structures at factory or before
upload. The engineer has the right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject any
material doesn’t math with the required specifications.

125
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

D.5 Concrete defects in steel construction that show non-compliance with the
specifications and requirements when statements and tests must be
corrected. Additional tests must be conducted at contractor's expense, until they re-
confirm the matching between the working and specification or not .
D.6 Welding in the site: the work of assembling steel must be previewed and tested as
follows:
D-6-1 Approval of the seams and make the necessary tests and disclosures. Types and places
of defects in the works must be registered and implemented the necessary work to
correct these defects.
D-6-2 visual check must be performed for all welding.
D-6-3 Welding tests must be performed for 10% of the total epic length as follows:
Angular welding:
Liquid Penetrate Inspection: ASTM E 165 or
Magnetic Particle Inspection): ASTM E 709. Applied to the roots of angular and
welding performed are selected at random. Will not accept the cracks and hacking and
places of incomplete welding.
Butt welding:
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142 and the degree of minimum
quality 2-2T, or
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164 for all the breakthroughs and partial welding.
D.7 Field Bolted Connections: Sampling is according to AISC or BS 5950, must preview
the installation of all bolts and verify the use and pressure washers for the loads shown
(load indicator washers) when all the screws for the Slip Critical bolts.
D.8 Welding in site: You must preview and test welding when you create
the structural steel as follows:
Approval of the seams and making the necessary tests and inspections. You must be
logged kinds of defects and places of business must be registered and implemented the
necessary work to correct these defects.
View the theory must be performed for all welding.
Welding tests must be performed as follows:
Examination of penetration of the liquid (Liquid Penetrant Inspection): ASTM E165
Magnetic Particle Inspection (Magnetic Particle Inspection): ASTM E709. Applied to
the roots and 10% of welding done angular chosen at random. Will not accept
the cracks and hacking and places of incomplete welding.
X-ray inspection (Radiographic Inspection): ASTM E 94and ASTM E 142 and the
degree of minimum quality 2-2T
Preview ultrasound (Ultrasonic Inspection): ASTM E164for 100% of
the full welding breakthroughs.
D.9 welding defects: cracks are not allowed, overlays, overlap, lack of penetration and
unfinished welding.

126
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

D.10 Laminating class tests: is a performed ultrasound test to determine the class
laminating panels on all the main links are determined (15 mm and above) in
accordance with the standards DIN 54120 or ASTM E164.
D.11 Mortar non retractile: Prepare cubes measuring 50 mm and tested for compressive
strength according to ASTM C109.
D.12 Must supply and install a local system / remote to detect the level of water.
Cathodic protection
General:
This section includes cathodic protection systems that use the negative anode to
protect the tanks.
Implementation requirements:
The contractor is required to appoint an efficient specialist engineer in corrosion to
design the cathodic protection systems and supervision of installation and testing it.
- Cathodic protection of steel storage tanks is shall be designed according to "National
Association of Corrosion Engineers" RP0285 (NACE), according to the specifications
of API RP 651.
The selection of the anode and suitable accessories shall be according to the level of
protection. The anode shall be designed to last for approx .15 years before being
replaced.
Exploration of the site shall be conducted for the determination of aggressiveness of
water/soil, the current requirements, potential surveys, stray currents and water
chemistry (pH) and corrosion.
Proposed Cathodic protection systems should secure the protection levels that
correspond with to the standards of the National Assembly of Corrosion Engineers.
Shop Drawings: detailed shop drawings must be provided as well as design
calculations for cathodic protection system, which will be installed, according to
technical specifications before starting the work.
Deliverables
The Contractor shall submit all data of materials for each of the following elements:
Anode
Insulating Flanges.
Covers, insulation and sealants.
Connections for eclectic insulators
Shop drawings: locate the equipment, tools and outlets for cathodic protection with
appropriate documentation and material data. This includes the calculations and
details of the anode design. It also includes general site planning, elevations, sections
and details of other works connecting to them, as well as a list of equipment and
materials.
Reports of field tests: reference should be made to test results and analysis to conform
with the requirements of good implementation. It should also include calculations of
anode Lifetime.

127
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

Quality Control in Site


Test: Qualified testing agency should be assigned to conduct the following tasks
according to Engineers approval in site.
Test: Quality test to be conducted under the supervision of an engineer specialized in
corrosion:
The drag-stable test: Select an entire anode randomly from each type for this
destructive test. This is to proof that anode wires are strong enough to carry a charge
of 136 kg as a minimum. If the test fails, replacement shall be done to all anodes, then
retesting another anode will be done on a randomly selected one.
Settings and Description
Cathodic current is adjusted using a resistor as recommended by the Engineer
specialized in corrosion.
During the first year after completion of Work, the cathodic protection system shall be
tested, verified and adjusted every three months to ensure permanent compliance with
the requirements and function specified.
User maintenance crew shall be trained to control the installation of cathodic
protection system, as well as its operation and maintenance.

3-4-9 PAINT AND PROTECTION OF SURFACES

3-4-9-1 PROTECTION OF SURFACES


- Internal and external surfaces of the tank should be cleaned by scrubbing
with sand to make the metal shine.
- Two layers of Zinc Rich Epoxy Primer should be painted.
- Clean by compressed air according to the specifications: (DIN 18364-212-3)
- Within two hours of cleaning by compressed air; spray a layer of monoxide
epoxy rich in zinc with finishing thickness not less than 25 microns.
- A layer of zinc rich epoxy primer -as previous- with thickness not less than
125 microns should be sprayed with pressure (without air).

3-4-9-2 TREATMENT OF DAMAGED PROTECTION LAYERS


Treatment of damaged protection layers must be as quick as possible and must not be
left until the general finishing of Work. Also damaged areas should be cleaned by wire
brush mechanism or by scrubbing with sand to make the metal shine, taking into
account covering the adjacent areas, then a new protective system shall be
implemented with the same specifications of the original system, or be modified when
necessary according to the manufacturer's instructions for protective materials used.

3-4-9-3 PAINTS
A- General
- All used paints shall be certified materials.
- All materials shall be delivered in well closed packages labeled by manufacturer,
components description and the method of the preparation and use.

128
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

- The Engineer shall approve the painting used colors, and the alternative layers
should have gradient various in color.
- Painting should be in dry atmosphere and on very clean and dry surface, and not in
temperature of 5 ° C or less .

B- Painting surfaces
- Painting surface should be prepared before painting and doing any additional
works recommended from the manufacturer as follows:
- Cleaning and removing grease with washing by clean water
- For metal works covered by Zinc rich epoxy primer, which may be exposed to
weather condition; the surface shall be washed by clean water to remove zinc salts
and then be dried.
C- Finish paint ( internal insulation for tanks )
Internal insulation for tanks shall be two-pronged material from pure Polyurea –
rapid hardening free of solvents and volatile matter, with solid materials (100%)
concentration. It shall be applied by spraying technique under high pressure with
spraying machines to 1000 microns thickness. The paint shall be executed on several
layers according to manufacturer recommendations in order to produce a water
isolating layer with high flexibility, strength, resistance to sunlight and chemicals
materials after it dries. All material shall be suitable for drinking water uses, validity
certificate for use with drinking water as per (WRC) shall be provided.
Insulation material shall have the following physical properties:
- Solids concentration 100%
- Volatile matter concentration 0%
- Hardness test (share D) 57
- Hardness test ( share A) 90
- Tensile strength 4360psi or 30 Mpa according to ASTM
412C
- Elasticity 450% according to ASTM 412C
- Fire resistance Grade B2
- Corrosion Resistance (on 1000 period) less than 6 ml gm
- Scaling resistance 900 psi
- Thermal Stability from -50C to +150C

D- Site painting during construction:


Site connections shall be painted with paint layer before the first layer gets dry, and in

129
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

case of damage of any finished area during transportation or installation; these shall be
cleaned and re- painted with prime layer according to the previous requirements for
the whole system.

E- Tanks External Paint


This is for outer surfaces not exposed to flushes nor submerged in water. These areas
shall be painted by a prime layer then by a finish layer of heavy duty epoxy Enamel
with Approved gradient in color. The minimum thickness of dry layer shall be 200
micron and be painted by spraying. The minimum duration between layer paintings is
16 hours.
** Tanks shall be filled with water only after 5 days (at least) of finishing the external
paint .

3-4-10 CHLORINATION SYSTEM - PROCESS


GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install all chlorinators, wiring, piping and accessories for the
complete chlorination system.

Description Qty.
1 Chlorinators 2
2 Chlorine Injectors 2
3 Chlorine residual measuring 1
4 Chlorine solution pump (water pump) 2
5 Chlorine gas main fold 1
6 Automatic switch gear 1
7 Chlorine pressure reducing and shut off valve 2
8 Leak detectors 1
9 Chlorine gas Containers 10
10 SAFTEY MASK 2
11 Safety Clothes. 2
12 Chlorine repair tools kit 1
13 Metal Clipboard 1
14 Crane 3 Ton capacity, for the chlorination 1
building, electrically operated, including all
necessary installation devices, wires and
controls.
15 uPVC Pipes for chlorine booster pumps, Lot
including necessary valves & fittings.
16 chlorine neutralizing system Lot

130
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

The equipment of the chlorination system shall be installed inside the chlorination
building.
The chlorination building shall be independent building and including all the
necessary equipments such as “but not limited to”; Injectors, chlorine cylinders,
control panel, chlorine solution pump,……etc
All pipes, valves and fittings shall be under vacuum and the chlorine gas pressure
shall be adjusted via pressure reducing valves
The chlorinators shall contain automatic safety features to prevent the escape of
chlorine gas in the event of:
- Failure of water supply
- Breakage of any part of the vacuum system.
- Blockage of solution line.
- Sudden power off.
Best chlorine resisting material shall be used through the whole parts of the system;
the unit shall be of modular design, free standing with all control components
protected within a rigid fiber-glass cabinet or similar. The components within the
cabinet shall be readily accessible from the front for ease of maintenance and shall be
easily replaceable.
CHLORINATORS
Contractor to supply and install 2”two” chlorinators one on duty other on standby
The chlorinators shall have a manual control (such that keeping the pre-adjusted chlorine up
to ±4% ), visible flow, solution feed, vacuum type arranged for automatic operation by
vacuum differential regulating valve. The chlorine gas shall be metered under a partial
vacuum provided by suitable injector units.
The chlorinators shall be automatically controlled by signals received separately from
chlorine residual controller.
The accurate dosing scale of the apparatus shall have a ratio of about 20: 1 between the
maximum and the minimum dosing rates. The rate will be automatically adjusted by means
of the chlorine residual analyzer / comparator according to the free chlorine residual.
The chlorinators shall be arranged so that each unit can handle the maximum requirements of
one stream with maximum chlorine capacity of ١0 Kg /hr, or serve as standby.
CHLORINE INJECTORS
Contractor to supply and install 2”two” injectors, suction type and shall have none return
valve and the injector nozzle shall be suitable for the hydraulic conditions to have the best
possible efficiency from the system.
Pressure gauges shall be installed on the boosted water.
CHLORINE SOLUTION PUMP (WATER PUMP)
Contractor to supply and install 2”two” pumping units vertical or horizontal type single or
multistage one on duty and the other as standby
The pumps shall be installed with the control system inside the chlorination building.
Each pump shall have an individual electrical motor insulation type IP55 air cooled 60hz with

131
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

soft starter and the operation time shall be up to 24 hours at 50 C̊ .


The pump head shall be selected in order to supply the chlorine ejector with sufficient
pressure to supply the chlorine diffusers (at the contact tanks inlet) with pressurized chlorine
solution. The pump shall have a working pressure that suits the system operation.
The pumps shall draw water from the treated network of the plant or from the chlorine contact
tank.
The pump shall be centrifugal vertical type of high efficiency. Each pump shall be directly
coupled to a totally enclosed air cooled electric motor, the motor shall be complete with its
starter, rated for continuous running (24 hours) at ambient temperature conditions.
The pumps shall be provided with all necessary valves, pressure gauges and fittings required.
CHLORINE GAS MAINFOLD
The chlorine system shall have 1”one” manifold that its material shall be chlorine gas
resistance and installed with all needed accessories
Each manifold shall be ready to connect 5”five” chlorine gas cylinders.
Shut off valves shall be stainless steel
AUTOMATIC SWITCH GEAR
The change over device shall be capable to work up to 10kg/hr of chlorine gas.
The device consists of motorized valve ignited through a contact relay for the low pressure
scenario .
Also it shall have indicator lamps for identifying the on duty unit
A manual valve shall be supplied in case of unavailability of the electrical sources.
The change over device shall be of compatible type with the system and wall mounted.
CHLORINE PRESSURE REDUCING AND SHUT OFF VALVE
The valve shall be independent type appropriate to the hard operation, it shall be provided
with a diaphragm and spring for the automatic adjustment of pressure and gas rate, also
provides with an arm for manual lock.
The valve consists of a body, diaphragm, soft seats, spindle, cone, and a guide, spring, and
locking arm
The diaphragm material shall be from high elasticity and anti leakage type.
The valve shall have a filter unit and pressure gauge directly installed on the chlorine gas
containers.
CHLORINE RESIDUAL MEASURING & CONTROL APPARATUS
All detectors shall be installed inside an insulated cabinet and its material shall be plasticized
anti –chlorine gas type and wall mounted.
The device shall have an auxillary internal battery rechargeable type for at least 4hours
operation time when power is off.
2 “two” alarm levels shall be available as follows:
Low Level ; adjusting the device from 1-3 mg/lit
High Level ; adjusting the device from 3-10 mg/lit
The device shall have 2 “two” alarm contacting relays for the low level and 3”three”
contacting relays for high level to activate the visual, sound and suction fans for the leaked

132
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

chlorine gas.
Visual and sound alarms shall be remotely observed in high and clear effects
Chlorine gas Containers
The contractor shall supply and install the chlorine gas containers with a capacity of 1000Kg.
The chlorine gas containers shall have an emergency lock shuts automatically in case of any
leakage for the gas.
Container specifications shall be accepted by the local authority responsible for chlorine gas
filling systems .
SAFETY tools
Contractor to supply :
- 2”two masks with air cylinders that provide the person with 30 minutes fresh air in
case of leakage emergency.
- 2”two” safety cloths
- Overall suit
- Gloves
- Boot safety shoes
- Safety glasses
- One complete repair kit tools
-
Clipboard
Contractor to supply 1”one” unit to be installed outside the injection room.
CHLORINE NEUTRALIZING SYSTEM
Contractor to supply and install the neutralizing system including the neutralization tower,
SODA pumps, air blowers and all needed accessories and the system shall be all automated
via signals received from chlorine leak detectors.
SPARE PARTS
Contractor to provide a detailed spare parts list to cover the project needs for 2”two” years.

3-5 SEWER NETWORK WORKS

3-5-1 PIPE WORKS


A. Vitrified Clay Pipes for Lines operating gravity drainage
A.1 Use vitrified clay pipes for sewer networks with pipe diameters from 200 to 600 mm.
A.2 Vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall be to SASO 235/236-1995 or BS EN 295 [18]
and shall be marked accordingly.
A.3 Pipes and fittings shall be glazed and shall comply with BS 295-1 Clause 2 and in
particular sub-clause 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.9, 2.10 & 2.14.
A.4 Pipes and fittings shall be Class 160 for pipes ≤ 500mm diameter and Class 120 for
pipes ≥ 600mm diameter crusting strength per Class in KN/m2 as given in Table 5 of
BS 295 part 1. Pipe may also be classified as standard strength or extra strength.

133
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

A.5 jointing material: sealing elements shall be polyurethane to Clauses 3.12 & 3.13.
A.6 Joints shall be water tight to Clauses 3.2 & 3.3 of EN 295.
A.6 Pipes shall be supplied with approved flexible and telescopic rubber ring joints which
shall be capable of withstanding the specified tests pressures applied both internally
and externally
A.7 Junctions on clay pipe sewers shall be of similar material and suitable for use with
flexibly jointed pipes
A.8 Before any length of pipe is laid, it shall be inspected and stood or slung vertically at
the side of the trench and “rung” with a wooden mallet. Any damaged or cracked pipe
shall be rejected.
A.9 Tests on vitrified Clay Pipes
The following tests shall be carried out on vitrified clay pipes and products. The third
party inspection report shall cover the following quality control test all as per SASO
235-1995 or DIN 1230 or the applicable standard specifications:
 Visual inspection
 Minimum bore
 Length
 Deviation from straightness
 Crushing strength
 Water tightness
 Polyurethane sealing elements
 Angular deflection

B. Vitrified Clay Pipes
Should be follow the manufacturer’s instructions accurately when handling this type
of pipe, and must make utmost care and caution when transported to the site and
installed. Each pipe should prove a good to stop all movement, which may cause harm
to the socket and the spigot pipe or the parties to the tongue and groove pipe.
Should be preview each pipe carefully before you put them, and cannot use any pipe
in which cracking or defects, such as cracks in the links the socket and the spigot
edges of the pipe or tangent and slitting opinion of the Engineer which can cause
defects in the links, and therefore must be avoided. Will be rejected and all cracked or
defective pipes.

3-5-2 MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS

3-5-2-1 GENERAL
A. Scope
A.1 This section specifies works related to:
 Sewage manholes and Inspection Chambers.
 Valve chambers for sewer force mains.

3-5-2-2 MATERIALS
A. Excavation and backfilling generally shall comply with the appropriate requirements
of Divisions 2 - 3 of the Specification.

134
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

B. Concrete work generally shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Division 3
of the Specification Item (3.5.1).
C. Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements as specified in Section 3.5.3 "Steel
Reinforcement and Fixing".
D. Precast units to BS 5911 [13] Part 200 or ASTM C478. Except for thickness which
shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Concrete shall be Class 250/20. Cement shall
be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197 [3].
E. Plain and reinforced concrete for cast In-Situ units shall be Class 210/25 and 250/25
respectively. Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197 [3].
F. Coatings shall be as specified in A5 and A6 of section 3.06.3. Alternative internal
coating is given in Section 3- 6-4.
G. Covers and frames shall be gray cast-iron non-rocking, locking, as per Ministry of
Transport specification and shall comply with BS EN 124 or ISO 1083 or DIN 1229
or equivalent. Wording on cover shall indicate nature of network (Sewerage – ‫صرف‬
‫ )صحي‬as required by Employer. Grades shall be as follows:
 In Roadways: Heavy duty test load 40 tons
 In Sidewalks, Carriage Drive and Cycle Tracks: Medium duty test load 25 tons
 In Footpaths: Light duty, test load 7 tons
H. Manhole covers shall be of circular pattern with 600 mm diameter unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings. Frames shall be provided with opening for fixing bolts which
ensure solid frame embedment into manhole concrete neck. Covers and frames shall
be coated with two layers coal tar epoxy (70% epoxy, 30% coal tar) to BS 3416 [4].
Minimum thickness 250 is microns.
I. Step irons shall be mild steel to BS 4211 [51], galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 [52]
with 200 grams of zinc per square meter and covered with two layers of polyethylene
(PE) or polypropylene.
I. Fixing bolts shall be steel, type suitable for particular purpose and use and to approval.
When used to fix galvanized material, washers are to be galvanized and fixing bolts
and nuts cut to pre-plating limits and electroplated with zinc to BS EN 12329 [53].
II. Steel castings shall be mild to medium strength castings and shall conform to
AASHTO M103 (ASTM A27). Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer, castings shall be grade 65-35 fully annealed. Steel
castings shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Test bars shall be
prepared and tested as specified in AASHTO M103.
III. Wrought iron plates and shapes shall conform to the dimensions shown on the
Drawings. Rolled wrought iron bars and shapes shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM A207. Wrought iron plates shall conform to ASTM A42.
IV. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all specified test coupons and
Manufacturers' Certificates of Guarantee for all structural steel, cast iron, cast steel
and wrought iron parts stating that the materials supplied meet the appropriate
AASHTO or ASTM specification. The submission of such test certificates shall not
relieve the Contractor of his obligations to carry out independent tests at an approved
laboratory, as directed by the Engineer, at his own expense.

3-5-2-3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION


A. Manholes and Inspection Chambers

135
General Directorate of Water - Aseer Region (Technical Specification for
Strategic Drinking Water Reservoirs for Water and Sewage Pipeline)
Urban Abha Region – Phase 1

A.1 Construction: In-situ concrete or precast concrete as indicated on Drawings or as


proposed by Contractor as per the site requirements but the distance between two
consecutive manholes should not exceed 100 m, the minimum distance will be
according to site situation and as directed by the Engineer. In-situ units shall comply
with the provisions of Division 4 for concrete works of these specifications.
A.2 Precast units shall be cast in steel watertight forms at least 3 weeks before sections are
used. Lowest unit shall be bedded on in situ concrete base and bed and haunch in
cement mortar. Joints of units shall be liberally coated with approved bituminous
material of trowelling grade prior to fixing. Joints shall be filled solid and neatly
striked off surplus compound. Work shall remain undisturbed for 7 days thereafter.
Alternatively joints may be sealed with approved preformed jointing strip in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The precast concrete cover slab shall be
bedded in cement mortar on the top unit.
A.3 Channels in bottom of manhole shall be smooth, semi-circular and sized equal to
diameter of adjacent sewers. For straight through manholes, channels of half pipe
sections shall be installed. Changes in direction of flow shall be made with smooth
curves as large as manholes permit. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
gradual and even.
A.4 Benching shall be formed with sulphate resisting concrete Class 250/20 to rise
vertically from top of channels to a height not less than soffit of outlet pipe, then it
shall be sloped upwards 1 in 10 to walls. Floating shall then be carried out within 3
hours with a coat of sulphate resisting cement-sand mortar 1:2. Smooth finishing shall
then be accomplished with a steel trowel.
A.5 Manholes and chambers shall be coated externally with three layers of asphaltic
composition that shall be applied by brush in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Minimum thickness shall be 600 microns.
A.6 Internal faces of chambers shall be coated with four coats of coal tar epoxy paint, 70%
epoxy and 30% coal tar. The coating shall be applied by brush in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Minimum thickness shall be 1000 microns.
A.7 Internal faces of manholes shall be coated with GRP or HDPE and base surfaces of
manholes shall be covered with epoxy mortar.
A.8 Step irons shall be cast into precast units or grouted into preformed mortices. Step
irons shall not be used as lifting eyes. Devices for lifting and handling are to be
provided on exterior faces.
A.9 Adjustment of level shall be accomplished with concrete rings after completion of
surrounding levels. Final levels shall be even and accurate.
A.10 Fames for covers and gratings shall be solidly bedded in mortar and fixed firmly using
fixing bolts. Position centrally over opening and level and square with surrounding
finishes. Set cover in position to prevent twisting.
A.11 The Contractor shall test manholes as follows:
 Plug manhole inlets and outlets.
 Fill manhole with water and allow standing for at least 24 hours or such longer
period to allow for complete absorption.
 Re-top with water.
 Allowable leakage over 24 hours shall not to exceed 1% of total volume of
manhole; otherwise necessary repair and re-testing shall be carried to achieve
the required results.

136

You might also like